mori seiki DuraTurn 1530, DuraTurn 2030, DuraTurn 2050, DuraTurn 2550 User Manual

USERS' MANUAL

Applicable Model

DuraTurn 1530

DuraTurn 2030

DuraTurn 2050

DuraTurn 2550

Applicable NC Unit

MSC-504

Before starting operation, maintenance, or programming, carefully read the manuals supplied by Mori Seiki, the NC unit manufacturer, and equipment manufacturers so that you fully understand the information they contain.

Keep the manuals carefully so that they will not be lost.

UM-DURATURN-C0JPEN

 

 

The contents of this manual are subject to change

 

 

 

without notice due to improvements to the machine or

 

 

 

in order to improve the manual. Consequently, please

 

 

 

bear in mind that there may be slight discrepancies

 

 

 

between the contents of the manual and the actual

 

 

 

machine. Changes to the instruction manual are

 

 

made in revised editions which are distinguished from

 

 

 

each other by updating the instruction manual

 

 

number.

 

 

 

 

 

Should you discover any discrepancies between the

 

 

 

 

 

 

contents of the manual and the actual machine, or if

 

 

any part of the manual is unclear, please contact Mori

 

 

 

Seiki and clarify these points before using the

 

 

machine. Mori Seiki will not be liable for any damages

 

 

 

 

 

occurring as a direct or indirect consequence of using

 

 

 

 

 

 

the machine without clarifying these points.

 

 

All rights reserved: reproduction of this instruction

 

 

manual in any form, in whole or in part, is not

 

 

permitted without the written consent of Mori Seiki.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

The product shipped to you (the machine and

 

 

 

accessory equipment) has been manufactured in

 

 

 

accordance with the laws and standards that prevail in

 

 

 

 

 

 

the relevant country or region. Consequently it cannot

 

 

 

be exported, sold, or relocated, to a destination in a

 

 

 

country with different laws or standards.

 

 

 

The export of this product is subject to an authorization

 

 

 

from the government of the exporting country.

 

 

 

Check with the government agency for authorization.

 

 

 

 

 

 

990730

Copyright 2007 MORI SEIKI CO., LTD. All rights reserved.

P-1

About the Machine

この機械は最新の技術を駆使して作られた切削用NC

*

*

<Basis>

This machine was designed and built using state-of-the-art technology for the purpose of machining rotating workpieces using cutting tools and soft jaws. This machine complies with generally recognized safety regulations, standards and specifications at the time of manufacture. This machine is suitable for manual and automatic operation.

<Tools>

This machine is capable of using common turning tools and rotary tools* (such as milling cutters, drills, and taps). Contact Mori Seiki before using grinding tools or special tools.

* For machines equipped to use rotary tools.

<Materials>

This machine is designed for machining metal, resin, and plastics. It was not intended for the machining of materials such as magnesium, carbon, ceramics, and wood. Contact Mori Seiki before using these materials.

P-2

About this Manual

Keep this manual in a clearly marked location to ensure easy access when necessary.

Contact Mori Seiki if any part of the manual is unclear.

Contact the Mori Seiki service department if this manual is lost or damaged.

The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notification due to improvements to the machine.

All rights reserved: reproduction of this instruction manual in any form is not permitted without the written consent of Mori Seiki.

Various manuals and documents are supplied with the machine in addition to this manual. Keep them close to the machine to enable easy reference.

P-3

Signal Word Definition

 

 

 

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not

 

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

 

avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

 

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

 

avoided, may result in minor injury or damage to the

 

machine.

 

[ ] Failure to observe the precautions (hazards,

 

warnings and cautions) will lead to the hazards

 

indicated in square brackets [ ], injuries or machine

 

trouble.

 

Indicates items that must be taken into consideration.

 

Indicates items to be referred to.

 

Indicates hints.

 

Indicates program-applied examples.

CONTENTS

FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION

1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1 FOR USERS AND SUPERVISORS

2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1 PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATORS

3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-2 FIRE PREVENTION

4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-4 SAFETY DEVICES

5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-5 CAUTION LABELS

6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-5 WORK ENVIRONMENT

7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-6 MACHINE OPERATING PRECAUTIONS

 

7-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. P-6

 

 

Precautions during Machine Operation

 

 

7-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. P-9

 

 

Mounting and Removing Chucks

 

 

7-3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

P-10

 

 

When Chucking Workpiece

 

 

7-4

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

P-12

 

 

Safety Practices during Setup

 

 

7-5

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

P-13

 

 

Automatic Operation

 

 

7-6

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

P-14

 

 

Interlock Functions

 

 

7-7

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

P-14

 

 

Data

 

 

7-8

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

P-15

 

 

Precautions when Operating Special Specification Machines

 

8

NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

P-16

 

NOTES CONCERNING NC PROGRAM

 

 

8-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

P-16

 

 

Cutting Conditions

 

 

8-2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

P-16

9

 

After Program Input

P-17

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

 

NOTES CONCERNING MAINTENANCE

 

 

9-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

P-17

 

 

When Performing Maintenance and Inspection Procedures

 

 

9-2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

P-18

 

 

Machine Management

 

9-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

P-19

Machine Noise Data

 

9-3-1

DuraTurn 1530 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

P-19

9-3-2

DuraTurn 2030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

P-20

9-3-3

DuraTurn 2050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

P-21

9-3-4

DuraTurn 2550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

P-22

1

 

 

 

CHAPTER 1

BASIC OVERVIEW

 

1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1

 

OPERATION ROUTE MAP

 

 

1-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 1-1

 

 

General Views

 

 

1-2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3

 

 

Machine Operation Panel

 

 

1-3

NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-5

2

 

NC Operation Panel

1-6

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

 

OVERVIEW OF CUTTING PROCESS (LATHE)

 

3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-7

 

CHECKING DRAWINGS

 

4

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-8

 

TURNING ON/OFF POWER

 

4-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Power ON Sequence

4-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Emergency Stop/To Restart Machine

4-2-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Executing an Emergency Stop with the [Emergency Stop] Button,

and Canceling the Emergency Stop Status

4-2-2 RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Executing an Emergency Stop with the (RESET) Key,

and Canceling the Emergency Stop Status

4-2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-11

Press the Automatic Operation Button [Feed Hold] to Execute or Cancel an Emergency Stop

4-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Turning OFF Power Supply

5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 ZERO RETURN OPERATION

5-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Manual Zero Return Operation

5-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Zero Return by Pressing the [One-Touch Zero Return] Button

6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 OPENING/CLOSING DOOR

6-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Door Lock Prevention Key

7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 DOOR INTERLOCK FUNCTION

7-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-18

 

Door Interlock for Standard Specifications

 

7-2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-19

 

Releasing Door Interlock Function

 

7-3

CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-20

 

Door Interlock Function (CE Specification)

 

 

7-3-1 CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-20

 

Releasing Door Interlock (CE Specifications)

 

8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 TOOL MOUNTING PROCEDURE

8-1 DuraTurn 1530 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-23

8-1-1

DuraTurn 1530 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-23

 

When Mounting the Cutting Tools Directly on the Turret Head (DuraTurn 1530)

 

8-1-2

DuraTurn 1530 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-27

 

When Mounting the Cutting Tools in Tool Holders (DuraTurn 1530)

 

8-2 DuraTurn 2030, DuraTurn 2050, DuraTurn 2550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-33

8-2-1

 

 

 

DuraTurn 2030, DuraTurn 2050, DuraTurn 2550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-33

 

When Mounting the Cutting Tools Directly on the Turret Head

 

 

(DuraTurn 2030, DuraTurn 2050, DuraTurn 2550)

 

8-2-2

 

 

 

DuraTurn 2030, DuraTurn 2050, DuraTurn 2550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-37

 

When Mounting the Cutting Tools in Tool Holders

 

 

(DuraTurn 2030, DuraTurn 2050, DuraTurn 2550)

 

9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43 SETTING TOOL GEOMETRY OFFSET VALUE (WITH TOOL PRESETTER)

9-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-45

 

Interlocks for Using Manual In-Machine Tool Presetter

 

9-2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-46

 

Installing and Removing the Manual In-Machine Tool Presetter Arm

 

9-3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-48

 

Measurement Procedure with the Manual In-Machine Tool Presetter

 

9-4

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-49

 

Sensors, Tools, and Parameters

 

10 Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51 SETTING WORKPIECE ZERO POINT (Z0)

10-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-52

 

Before Setting

 

10-2

Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-52

 

Setting Workpiece Zero Point (Z0)

 

11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54 CHUCKING

11-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-55

 

Clamping/Unclamping Chuck

 

 

11-1-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-55

 

 

Chuck Footswitch

 

 

11-1-2

2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-56

 

 

Twin Chuck Footswitch (Option)

 

 

11-1-3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-56

 

 

Fixing Footswitch

 

11-2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-57

 

Adjusting the Chucking Pressure

 

 

 

 

 

12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58 JAW SHAPING

12-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58 Shaping the Soft Jaws

12-1-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58 Cautions on Shaping the Soft Jaws

12-1-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60 Soft Jaw Shapes

12-1-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61 Check Items when Mounting Tools and Shaping Soft Jaws

12-1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62 The Procedure Used for Shaping the Soft Jaws

13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-73 TAILSTOCK (TAILSTOCK SPECIFICATIONS)

13-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74 Preparing the Tailstock

13-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75 Moving the Tailstock Body

13-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76 Tailstock Spindle Operation

13-3-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76 Tailstock Spindle IN/OUT Operation

13-3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77 Tailstock Spindle Inching Operation

13-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77 Tailstock Spindle Interlock

13-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-78 Adjusting the Tailstock Spindle Thrust

14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79 BUILT-IN TYPE WORK UNLOADER (OPTION)

14-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79 Work Unloader Buttons

14-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-80 Adjusting the Work Unloader

15 NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82 NC PROGRAMMING OVERVIEW

15-1 NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-84 Terms for NC Programming

15-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-85 Axis Control and Movement Direction

15-2-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-85 Movement along the Controlled Axes

15-2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-86 Expressing Axis Movement in Programming

15-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-87 Specifying the Dimensions

15-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-88 Functions of Program

15-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89 Programming Steps

15-5-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89 Flowchart to Complete a Program

15-5-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89 Programming Method

15-5-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89 Basic Pattern of Program

15-5-3-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89 Chuck-Work Programming

15-5-3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91 Center-Work Programming

15-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-92 Cautions for Creating a Program

15-6-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-92 Signs and Symbols Entered in Programs

15-6-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-92 Inputting a Decimal Point

15-6-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-93 Role of Decimal Point

15-7 JIS JIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-94 JIS Specification and Reverse JIS Specification

16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-96 PROGRAM CHECK

16-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-96

 

Checking the Program Using the [Program Check] Button

 

16-2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-101

 

Checking the Program with the Coordinate System Shifted

 

17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-104

TEST CUTTING (WORKPIECE FINISHING WITHIN

SPECIFIED TOLERANCE USING TOOL WEAR OFFSET FUNCTION)

17-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-104

 

Check Items before Executing Test Cutting

 

17-2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-105

 

Check Items after Executing Test Cutting

 

17-3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-106

 

Test Cutting Procedure

 

18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-109 MASS PRODUCTION

18-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-109

 

Conditions for Starting Automatic Operation

 

18-2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-111

 

Check Items before Starting Mass Production

 

18-3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-112

 

Inspection Items at Beginning/End of Daily Operation

 

 

18-3-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-112

 

Before the Operation and the Machining

 

 

18-3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-112

 

At the End of Machine Operation

 

2

 

CHAPTER 2

MACHINE OPERATIONS

1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 POWER-RELATED

1-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Operation Panel

1-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Electrical Cabinet Door

1-2-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Opening Electrical Cabinet Door

1-2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Main Power Switch

2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 MACHINE OPERATION PANEL

2-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Operation Selection Key-Switch

2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Mode Selection Buttons

2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Automatic Operation Buttons

2-4 NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 NC Function Buttons

2-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 [Single Block] Button

2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-12

 

Spindle/Milling Buttons

 

 

2-6-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-13

 

Axis Selection Buttons

 

 

2-6-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-13

 

Spindle Rotation Buttons

 

 

2-6-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-14

 

Spindle Speed Setting Buttons

 

 

2-6-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-15

 

Spindle Override Meter

 

 

2-6-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-15

 

Starting and Stopping Spindle Rotation

 

2-7

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-16

 

Axis Feed Buttons

 

 

2-7-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-17

 

Jog Feed Operation

 

 

2-7-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-18

 

Rapid Traverse Operation

 

 

2-7-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-18

 

[One-Touch Zero Return] Button

 

2-8

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-19

 

Feedrate Override Switch

 

2-9

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-20

 

Rapid Traverse Rate Override Switch

 

2-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Handle Switches

2-10-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Axis Selection Switch

2-10-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Axis Feed Amount Selection Buttons

2-10-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Handle Feed Operation

2-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 [Turret Indexing] Button

2-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 [Automatic Power Shutoff] Button (Option)

2-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 [Machine Light] Button

2-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 [Air Blow] Button (Option)

2-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Chip Conveyor Buttons (Chip Conveyor Specification)

2-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 [Door Unlock] Button

2-17 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Tailstock/Spindle 2 Buttons

2-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Coolant Buttons

2-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Status Indicators

3 NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 NC OPERATION PANEL

3-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-29

 

Soft-Keys

 

 

3-1-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-30

 

Page Selection Keys

 

 

3-1-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-30

 

Program Edit Keys

 

3-2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-31

 

Data Entry Key

 

3-3 SHIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-31

 

(SHIFT) Key

 

3-4 INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-31

 

(INPUT) Key

 

3-5 RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-31

 

(RESET) Key

 

3-6 CAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-32

 

(CAN) Key

 

3-7 HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-32

 

(HELP) Key

 

3-8

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-32

 

Function Selection Keys

 

4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 FUNCTION SELECTION KEYS AND DISPLAY SCREENS

4-1 POS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Function Selection Key (POS)

4-1-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Actual Position (Absolute) Screen

4-1-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Actual Position (Relative) Screen

4-1-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Actual Position (Overall) Screen

4-1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 Operating Monitor Screen

4-2 PROG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 Function Selection Key (PROG)

4-2-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Program Screen

4-2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Current Block Screen

4-2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Next Block Screen

4-2-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Program Check Screen

4-2-5 MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 MDI Program Screen

4-2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 Program List Screen

4-2-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 Foreground Edit Screen

4-2-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 Background Edit Screen

4-3 OFS/SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Function Selection Key (OFS/SET)

4-3-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Tool Offset Screen

4-3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Setting Screen

4-3-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Work Coordinates Screen

4-3-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Macro Variable Setting Screen

4-3-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Chuck/Tailstock Barrier Setting Screen

4-4 SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Function Selection Key (SYSTEM)

4-4-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Parameter Screen

4-4-2 NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 NC Internal State Display Screen

4-4-3 PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 PMC Screen

4-4-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 System Composition Screen

4-4-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Pitch Error Setting Screen

4-4-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Operation History Screen

4-4-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-43

Read/Punch Screen

 

4-4-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-43

Maintenance Information Screen

 

4-5 MESSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-44

Function Selection Key (MESSAGE)

 

4-5-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-44

Alarm Message Screen

 

4-5-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-44

Operator Message Screen

 

4-5-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-44

Alarm History Screen

 

4-5-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-44

Message History Screen

 

4-6 CSTM/GR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-45

Function Selection Key (CSTM/GR)

 

4-6-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-45

Operation Panel Screen

 

4-6-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-48

Tool Life Management Screen

 

4-6-3 PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-48

PC Work Counter Screen

 

5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 PROGRAM EDITING

5-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-49

 

Storing a Program to NC Memory

 

5-2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-50

 

Foreground and Background

 

 

5-2-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-50

 

Foreground Editing

 

 

5-2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-50

 

Background Editing

 

5-3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-51

 

Search Function

 

 

5-3-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-51

 

Program Number Search

 

 

5-3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-51

 

Sequence Number Search

 

 

5-3-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-52

 

Word Search

 

5-4

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-53

 

Program Editing

 

 

5-4-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-54

 

Copy and Deletion of Programs

 

 

5-4-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-54

 

Editing a Program by Word Unit

 

 

5-4-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-55

 

Copy and Move

 

 

5-4-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-55

 

Replacing Words

 

 

5-4-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-56

 

Inserting Sequence Numbers Automatically

 

 

5-4-5-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-57

 

Conditions for Inserting Sequence Numbers Automatically

 

5-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 Inputting and Outputting Programs Using an External I/O Device

5-5-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 Preparation

5-5-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 Cautions on Program Input/Output Operation

5-5-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 Inputting Program from Memory Card

5-5-4 RS232C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 Inputting Program from RS232C

5-5-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 Outputting Program to Memory Card

5-5-6 RS232C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 Outputting Program to RS232C

6 G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61 G FUNCTIONS

6-1

G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-61

 

G Code List

 

6-2

G00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-64

 

G00

Positioning the Cutting Tool at a Rapid Traverse Rate

 

6-3

G01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-66

 

G01

Moving the Cutting Tool along a Straight Path at a Cutting Feedrate

 

6-4 G01 R . . . . . . . . . . .

2-67

 

G01

Line at Angle Command, Chamfering and Rounding Functions

 

 

(Using Drawing Dimension Direct Input Function)

 

 

6-4-1

G01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-67

 

 

 

G01: Line at Angle Command

 

 

6-4-2 G01 R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-69

 

 

 

G01: Chamfering and Rounding Functions

 

 

6-4-3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-71

 

 

 

Cautions on Using the Drawing Dimension Direct Input Function

 

6-5 G02, G03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-72

 

G02, G03 Moving the Cutting Tool along Arcs at a Cutting Feedrate

 

6-6

G04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-74

 

G04

Suspending Program Execution (Dwell)

 

6-7 G28 G30 2 3, 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-76

 

G28

Returning Axes to Machine Zero Point Automatically,

 

 

G30

Returning Axes to Second (Third or Fourth) Zero Point Automatically

 

6-8 G32 G92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-78

 

G32

Thread Cutting, G92 Thread Cutting Cycle

 

 

6-8-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-80

 

 

 

Incomplete Thread Portion

 

 

6-8-2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-81

 

 

 

Precautions on Thread Cutting Operation

 

 

6-8-3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-83

 

 

 

Depth of Cut and Number of Passes for Thread Cutting

 

 

6-8-4

 

 

 

 

 

JIS B 0203-1982 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-84

 

 

 

Basic Profile and Dimensions and Dimensional Deviations

 

 

 

 

of Taper Pipe Threads (Extract from JIS B 0203-1982)

 

6-9 G32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93 G32 Tapping (at the Center of Spindle)

6-9-1 G32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94 Cautions on Programming Tapping Using G32

6-9-1-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94 Dwell Command

 

6-9-1-2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-95

 

 

 

Precautions on Using the Tapper

 

 

6-9-1-3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-95

 

 

 

To Finish Tapping at Correct Depth in Blind Hole

 

6-10

G34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-97

 

G34

Variable Lead Threading

 

6-11 G50 G96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-98

 

G50

Setting Maximum Spindle Speeds, G96 Controlling Constant Surface Speed

 

6-12

G53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-100

 

G53

Selecting the Machine Coordinate System

 

6-13 G54 G59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-101

 

G54 to G59 Selecting a Work Coordinate System

 

6-14

G65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-104

 

G65

Macro Call (One-Shot)

 

 

6-14-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-104

 

 

 

Argument Assignment

 

 

6-14-1-1

I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-104

 

 

 

Argument Assignment I

 

 

6-14-1-2

II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-105

 

 

 

Argument Assignment II

 

 

6-14-1-3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-105

 

 

 

Mixture of Argument Assignments I and II

 

 

6-14-2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-106

 

 

 

Nesting Level for Calls

 

6-15 G66 G67 . . . .

2-107

 

G66

Macro Modal Call (Every Axis Travel Command), G67 Macro Modal Call Cancel

 

6-16 G90 G94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-109

 

G90

O.D./I.D. Cutting Cycle, G94 Face Cutting Cycle

 

6-17

G97 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-110

 

G97

Controlling Spindle Speed at Constant Speed

 

6-18 G98, G99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-112

 

G98, G99 Setting Feedrate Units

 

7 M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114 M FUNCTIONS

7-1

M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-114

 

M Code List

 

 

7-1-1 M 1000 M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-117

 

 

Quick M-Code (M-Code which Start from 1000)

 

7-2 M00 M01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-118

 

M00

Program Stop, M01 Optional Stop

 

7-3 M02 M30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-119

 

M02 Program End, M30 Program End and Rewind

 

7-4

M03

M04 M05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-120

 

M03

Spindle Start, M04 Spindle Start in the Reverse Direction, M05 Spindle Stop

 

7-5

M08

M09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-122

 

M08

Coolant Discharge ON, M09 Coolant Discharge OFF

 

7-6

M10

M11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-123

 

M10

Spindle Chuck Clamp, M11 Spindle Chuck Unclamp

 

7-7 M23 M24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-125 M23 Chamfering ON, M24 Chamfering OFF

7-8 M25 M26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-127 M25 Tailstock Spindle OUT, M26 Tailstock Spindle IN

7-8-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-128 Center-Work Programming with Safety

7-9 M28 M29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-131 M28 In-Position Check Valid, M29 In-Position Check Invalid

7-10 M48

M49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-133 M48 Feedrate Override Cancel OFF, M49 Feedrate Override Cancel ON

7-11 M51

M59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-133 M51 Spindle Chuck Air Blow ON, M59 Spindle Chuck Air Blow OFF (Option)

7-12 M70 M482 M483 . . . . . . . . 2-134 M70 Bar Stock Supply ON, M482 New Bar Stock Supply to Bar Feeder,

M483 Bar Stock Supply OFF (Option)

7-13 M73 M74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-136 M73 Work Unloader OUT, M74 Work Unloader IN (Option)

7-14 M85/M220 M86/M221 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-138 M85/M220 Automatic Door OPEN, M86/M221 Automatic Door CLOSE (Option)

7-15 M89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-139 M89 Work Counter

7-16 M98/198 M99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-141 M98/198 Sub-Program Call, M99 Return from Sub-Program

7-16-1 M98, M99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-141 Using M98 and M99 Commands

7-16-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142 Nesting

7-16-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-143 Repeating Sub-Program Calls

7-16-4 M198 M99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-144 Using M198 and M99 Commands

7-16-5 M98, M99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-145 Programming Using M98 and M99

7-17 M200 M201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-147 M200 Chip Conveyor Forward Rotation Start, M201 Chip Conveyor Stop

7-18 M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-147 Multiple M Code Function

8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-148 PROGRAM TO SHORTEN PROCESSING TIME

9 T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-150 T FUNCTION

9-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-150 Tool No.

9-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-151 Tool Geometry Offset

9-2-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-152 Tool Wear Offset

10 S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-157 S FUNCTION

10-1 - - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-158 Relationship among Cutting Speed, Diameter, and Spindle Speed

11 F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-159 F FUNCTION

11-1 1 G99 F_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-159 Feed per Spindle Revolution (G99 F_ )

11-2 1 G98 F_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-160 Feed per Minute (G98 F_ )

11-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-161 Feedrate for Finishing

12 . . . . . . . . 2-162

SETTING TOOL GEOMETRY OFFSETS AND COORDINATE SYSTEMS (WITHOUT TOOL PRESETTER)

12-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-162

 

Flow of Tool Geometry Offset and Coordinate System Setting

 

12-2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-163

 

Preparation for Tool Geometry Offset/Coordinate System Setting

 

12-3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-165

 

Tool Geometry Offset Value Measurement/Entry

 

12-4

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-170

 

Setting Work Coordinate System

 

 

12-4-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-170

 

Relationship between Work Coordinate System and Tool

 

 

12-4-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-170

 

Setting Cutting Allowance on Workpiece End Face

 

13 R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-171 AUTOMATIC TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET

13-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-171 General

13-2 R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-174

Conditions for Use of the Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset Function

 

13-2-1

" " . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-174

 

Setting the "Imaginary Tool Tip Position"

 

13-2-2

R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-177

 

Setting Tool Nose Radius

 

13-2-3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-177

 

Specifying the Offset Direction

 

13-3 R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-178

Technical Terms Used in the Explanation

 

of the Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset Function

 

13-3-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-178

 

Start-Up

 

13-3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-180 Offset Mode

13-3-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-181 Cancel Mode

13-4 R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-183 General Cautions on the Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset Function

13-4-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-183 If a Wall Lies at the End of Cutting

13-4-2 R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-186 Overcut in the Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset Mode

13-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-188 Example Program

13-5-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-188 Basic Programs

13-6 R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-197 Recommended Example Programs (Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset)

14 R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-200 MANUAL TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET

14-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-200 General

14-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-201 Offset for Taper Cutting and Chamfering

14-2-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-201 Offset Method

14-2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-202 Calculating Offset Data

14-2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-204 Offset Direction and Calculation of Coordinate Values

14-2-3-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-204 Offset Direction

14-2-3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-205 Calculating Coordinate Values

14-2-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-209 Example Program

14-2-5 R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-212 Manual Offset Data Table

14-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-216 Offset in Circular Interpolation

14-3-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-216 Convex Arc

14-3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-216 Concave Arc

14-3-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-217 Calculating the Coordinate Values to be Specified in a Program

14-3-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-217 Example Program

14-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-220 Example Programming (Sample Workpiece)

15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-226 MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES

15-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-226 General

15-2 G71, G72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-229 G71, G72 Rough Cutting Cycle

15-3 G73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-238 G73 Closed-Loop Cutting Cycle

15-4 G71, G72, G73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-242 Cautions on Using G71, G72, and G73 Cycles

15-5 G70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-244 G70 Finishing Cycle

15-6 G74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-246 G74 Face Cut-Off, Grooving Cycle and Deep Hole Drilling Cycle

15-7 G75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-250 G75 O.D./I.D. Grooving Cycle, Cut-Off Cycle

15-8 G76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-254

G76 Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle

15-8-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-256

 

Infeed Mode

 

15-8-2

G76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-257

 

Cautions on G76 Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle

 

15-8-3

1 . . . . . . . . .

2-257

 

Relationship between Depth of Cut

 

 

in First Cycle and Number of Thread Cutting Cycles

 

 

(Fixed Metal Removal Rate and Straight Feed along the Thread Face)

 

15-8-3-1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-257

 

Calculating Number of Thread Cutting Paths when

 

 

Depth of Cut for First Path is Given

 

15-8-3-2 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-258

 

Calculating Depth of Cut for First Path when

 

 

Number of Thread Cutting Paths is Given

 

16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-260 HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLE

16-1 G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-263 Hole Machining Canned Cycle List (G Codes)

16-1-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-263 Face Hole Machining Canned Cycle

16-2 G83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-265 G83 Face Drilling Cycle

16-2-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-265 Face High-Speed Deep Hole Drilling Cycle

16-2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-266 Face Deep Hole Drilling Cycle

16-2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-268 Face Spot Drilling Cycle

16-2-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-269 Face Spot Drilling Cycle (Dwell)

16-3 G84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-271 G84 Face Tapping Cycle

16-4 G85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-273 G85 Face Boring Cycle

16-5 M329 G84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-275 M329 G84 Face Synchronized Tapping Cycle (at the Center of Spindle)

16-6 G84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-277 Cautions on Programming Using G84

16-6-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-277 Dwell Command

16-6-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-278 Precautions on Using the Tapper

16-6-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-278 To Finish Tapping at Correct Depth in Blind Hole

17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-280 EXAMPLE PROGRAM

17-1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-281 Chuck-Work Programming (1)

17-2 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-287 Chuck-Work Programming (2)

17-2-1 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-288 1st Process

17-2-2 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-292 2nd Process

17-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-297 Various Part Programs

17-3-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-297 Grooving

17-3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-298 I.D. Deep Hole Drilling

18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-299 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION

18-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-300 Setting Tool Life Data by Manual Operation

18-1-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-300 Tool Life Management Screen

18-1-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-302 Tool Detail Screen

18-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-303 Setting the Tool Life Data in Program

18-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-304 Specification in Machining Program

18-3-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-304 Group Command

18-3-2 M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-304 Life Count M Code

18-3-2-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-304 Counting the Tool Life

18-3-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-305 Skip Command

18-3-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-305 State Flag Clear Command

18-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-306 New Tool Selection Flag and Tool Life Expired Flag

18-4-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-306 New Tool Selection Flag

18-4-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-306 Tool Life Expired Flag

18-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-307 Reading Tool Life Management Information

18-6 PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-309 Reading PMC Address Information

18-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-310 Alarm Table

18-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-311 Parameters

19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-312 SETTING BARRIER TO DEFINE THE TOOL ENTRY PROHIBITION ZONE

19-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-312

 

Chuck/Tailstock Barrier Function

 

 

19-1-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-312

 

 

Setting Procedure

 

 

19-1-2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-314

 

 

Alarm Message

 

19-2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-315

 

Stored Stroke Check Function

 

20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-317 REGULAR MAINTENANCE

20-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-317

 

Importance of Inspections

 

20-2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-318

 

Regular Inspection List

 

20-3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-320

 

Maintenance Route Map

 

 

20-3-1 DuraTurn 1530, DuraTurn 2030. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-320

 

20-3-2 DuraTurn 2050, DuraTurn 2550. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-322

20-4

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-324

 

Oils

 

 

20-4-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-324

 

Recommended Oils

 

 

20-4-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-325

 

Equivalent Oils

 

20-5

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-326

 

Limit Switch Position

 

20-6

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-327

 

Preparation for Machine Operation after Prolonged Idle Period

 

20-7

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-328

 

Machining Chamber

 

 

20-7-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-328

 

Replacing Machining Chamber Observation Window

 

 

20-7-2 DuraTurn 2050, DuraTurn 2550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-330

 

Replacing Tailstock Observation Window (DuraTurn 2050, DuraTurn 2550)

 

 

20-7-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-331

 

Cleaning Inside Machine

 

 

20-7-3-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-331

 

Cleaning Spindle Drain Hole

 

 

20-7-3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-332

 

Cleaning Slideway (Ball Screw) Protective Covers and Operator Door Rail

 

 

20-7-3-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-332

 

Cleaning Cylinder Rear Section (Hollow Chuck Specifications)

 

 

20-7-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-333

 

Cleaning the Chuck

 

 

20-7-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-334

 

Replacing Machine Light

 

20-8

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-336

 

Coolant Unit

 

 

20-8-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-336

 

Precautions when Selecting Coolant

 

 

20-8-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-338

 

Replenishing Coolant

 

 

20-8-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-338

 

Adjusting Coolant Supply Rate

 

 

20-8-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-339

 

Cleaning the Coolant Tank and Filter (Machine without External Chip Conveyor)

 

 

20-8-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-341

 

Cleaning the Coolant Tank and Filter (Machine with External Chip Conveyor)

 

 

20-8-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-344

 

Flow of Coolant and Positions where Used

 

20-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-345 Hydraulic Unit

20-9-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-345 Precautions when Performing Maintenance Work

20-9-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-345 Checking Oil Level/Replenishing Oil

20-9-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-346 Replacing Oil

20-9-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-347 Checking Pressure Gage

20-9-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-347 Cleaning Radiator

20-9-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-348 Cleaning Suction Strainer and Tank

20-9-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-350 Flow of Hydraulic Oil and Positions where it is Used

20-9-7-1 DuraTurn 1530, DuraTurn 2030. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-350 20-9-7-2 DuraTurn 2050, DuraTurn 2550. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-351

20-9-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-352 Hydraulic Circuit Diagram

20-9-8-1 DuraTurn 1530, DuraTurn 2030. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-352 20-9-8-2 DuraTurn 2050, DuraTurn 2550. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-354

20-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-356 Lubricating Unit

20-10-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-356 Replenishing Lubricant

20-10-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-356 Cleaning Line Filter

20-10-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-357 Cleaning Lubricant Tank, Suction Filter and Fill Port Filter

20-10-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-358 Flow of Lubricant and Positions where Used

20-10-4-1 DuraTurn 1530, DuraTurn 2030. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-358 20-10-4-2 DuraTurn 2050, DuraTurn 2550. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-359

20-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-360 Pneumatic Devices (Option)

20-11-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-360 Air Pressure Inspection and Adjustment

20-11-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-360 Manual Draining from Air Filter

20-11-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-361 Air Filter Inspection and Filter Element Replacement

20-11-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-362 Flow of Compressed Air and Positions where it is Used

20-11-4-1 DuraTurn 1530, DuraTurn 2030. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-362 20-11-4-2 DuraTurn 2050, DuraTurn 2550. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-363

20-11-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-364 Air Circuit Diagram

20-11-5-1 DuraTurn 1530, DuraTurn 2030. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-364 20-11-5-2 DuraTurn 2050, DuraTurn 2550. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-365

20-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-366 Electrical Cabinet

20-12-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-366 Electrical Cabinet View

20-12-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-367 Opening/Closing Electrical Cabinet Door

20-12-2-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-367 Precautions when Opening/Closing Electrical Cabinet Door

20-12-2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-367 Opening Electrical Cabinet Door with Main Power OFF

20-12-2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-368 Closing Electrical Cabinet Door with Main Power OFF

20-12-2-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-368 Opening Electrical Cabinet Door with Main Power ON

20-12-2-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-369 Closing Electrical Cabinet Door with Main Power ON

20-12-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-369 Cleaning Electrical Cabinet Fan and Filter

20-12-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-371 Replacing Batteries

20-12-4-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-371 Precautions when Replacing Batteries

20-12-4-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-371 SERVO Absolute Position Sensing Battery

20-12-4-3 NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-372 NC Memory Back-Up Battery

20-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-373 Chip Conveyor

20-13-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-373 Precautions when Using Chip Conveyor

20-13-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-374 Operating Chip Conveyor

20-13-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-374 Cleaning Chip Conveyor

20-13-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-375 Adjusting Chip Conveyor Belt

21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-377 TROUBLESHOOTING

21-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-377

 

Alarm Message

 

 

21-1-1

NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-377

 

 

NC Alarm

 

 

21-1-2 PLC EX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-377

 

 

PLC Alarm (Alarm Starting with "EX")

 

21-2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-378

 

Input/Output Signal Confirmation Procedure

 

21-3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-380

 

Malfunctions at Main Power ON

 

 

21-3-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-380

 

 

Screen not Displayed when Power Turned ON

 

 

21-3-2

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-381

 

 

Screen Displayed but Cannot Advance when [OK] Soft-Key Pushed

 

 

21-3-3

" " . . . .

2-381

 

 

"Open/Close Door" Display does not Disappear when Door Opened/Closed

 

 

21-3-4

EX0069 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-382

 

 

EX0069 (Door Lock Time Over)

 

 

 

 

 

21-4

"300 APC n " . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-383

 

Example of Countermeasures when "300 APC ALARM:

 

 

n AXIS ORIGIN RETURN" is Displayed

 

21-5

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-386

 

Soft-Overtravel Alarm

 

21-6

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-387

 

Coolant Unit Problems

 

 

21-6-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-387

 

When Coolant Spills on the Floor

 

 

21-6-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-387

 

When Coolant is not Supplied

 

 

21-6-2-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-387

 

Coolant Pump Operation Check

 

 

21-6-2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-387

 

Coolant Level Check

 

 

21-6-2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-388

 

When the Coolant Pump is not Operating

 

21-7

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-390

 

Hydraulic Unit Alarms

 

 

21-7-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-390

 

Hydraulic Unit Alarms

 

21-8

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-391

 

Lubrication Unit Alarms

 

 

21-8-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-391

 

Lubricating Unit Abnormal Pressure Alarm Triggered

 

 

21-8-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-393

 

Checking Lubricating Unit Operation

 

 

21-8-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-393

 

Air Bleeding

 

 

21-8-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-394

 

Relief Valve Disassembly/Cleaning

 

 

21-8-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-395

 

Relief Valve Adjustment

 

 

21-8-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-396

 

Lubricant Leakage Check

 

21-9

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-397

 

When Intended Accuracy Cannot be Achieved

 

 

21-9-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-397

 

Adjusting Machine Level

 

 

21-9-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-397

 

Checking Accuracy and Making Adjustments

 

21-10

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-398

 

Tool Presetter Stylus Break Stem Replacement

 

 

FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION

P-1

 

 

 

FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION

1

FOR USERS AND SUPERVISORS

1. るようにしてください。

1.Understand the contents of this manual thoroughly. Store this manual close to the machine to enable easy reference whenever necessary.

2.Do not allow persons who lack basic knowledge of the machine or sufficient training to perform operation, maintenance or programming of the machine. Mori Seiki is not liable for accidents.

3.Determine the most appropriate settings.

4.Do not change or modify the machine without prior consultation with Mori Seiki. Mori Seiki is not liable for accidents.

5.Take adequate safety measures for both machine and operators.

6.Provide operators with sufficient training and education prior to operation. Prohibit anyone without sufficient safety training from entering the plant and vicinity of the machine.

7.This machine is manufactured for use by persons with normal senses. Actual machine operations are the sole responsibility of the user.

8.Do not export, resell or relocate to a destination with different laws or standards.

2

PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATORS

3." " " "" "

1.Before operating or programming the machine, or performing maintenance procedures, read and understand this manual thoroughly.

2.Prior to machine operation, take necessary training and education.

3.Assume that something is impossible unless the manual specifically states that it can be done.

4.Never operate, maintain, or program the machine while under the influence of alcohol or drugs.

5.Trim clothing and hair. [Entanglement]

6.Wear safety shoes, eye protectors and a helmet at all times.

P-2

 

FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION

3

FIRE PREVENTION

MSDS

機械に対して化学的に影響のないクーラントを使 用してください。MSDS

3. セミドライ加工を含む

Failure to observe the following warnings may result in a fire or machine damage. Mori Seiki is not liable for any fire whose cause is other than a product defect.

1.When machining using coolant

Receive the MSDS (MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET) from the coolant manufacturer directly yourself as the customer and use coolant without any chemical effects on the machine. Take careful note of the effects on the human body and the storage method described in the MSDS.

Before starting automatic operation, check the amount of coolant in the coolant tank, and replenish coolant if necessary. When insufficient coolant is applied to the cutting point, the machined part will heat up due to insufficient cooling, and this may result in a fire.

2.When machining using flammable coolant (not recommended)

Do not use a flammable coolant such as oil-based coolant, as it has high risk of a fire which may spread to the entire machine. If a flammable coolant is used out of necessity, any consequent fire or accident must be dealt with as the users' responsibility.

Always monitor the machining process and do not carry out unmanned operation. Install appropriate automatic fire extinguishing equipment to quickly extinguish fire at an early stage.

Check the flash point and the ignition point of the coolant to be used. Manage the material of the tools and workpieces, and tool wear so that the temperature during machining does not exceed these points.

When coolant becomes a mist inside the machine, it may burn explosively in abnormal temperature conditions. Change the coolant discharge method so that no coolant mist becomes suspended inside the machine, or install equipment to collect the coolant mist generated.

Use an explosion-proof mist collector.

Check the instructions on coolant in the manuals in advance, and follow them.

3.When machining without using coolant (including dry cutting and semi-dry cutting)

Check and manage the materials of the tools and workpieces to be used to prevent fire due to heat generated in the machining process.

4.When machining workpieces made of flammable material

Always monitor the machining process and do not carry out unmanned operation. Install appropriate automatic fire extinguishing equipment to quickly extinguish fire at an early stage.

Check and manage the tools and machining conditions to be used so that the temperature during machining does not exceed the ignition point.

Materials such as magnesium may burn explosively when exposed to water while burning. Check the fire-fighting methods and equipment in advance, and install the equipment at suitable locations for quickly extinguishing fire.

 

FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION

P-3

 

 

 

5.

5. Before starting automatic operation

 

 

Reconfirm that all parts of the tools and tool

 

 

 

holders are securely tightened. Insufficient

 

 

 

tightening leads to insufficient tool clamping, and

 

 

may result in an accident or a fire caused by heat.

 

Reconfirm that the workpiece is securely

 

 

 

clamped. If a workpiece is not clamped securely,

 

 

it may shift and make contact with a tool, resulting

 

 

in a fire caused by heat.

 

 

Do not use worn or damaged tools. If worn or

 

 

 

damaged tools are used, chips may clog them,

 

 

resulting in a fire caused by heat.

 

 

Before starting automatic operation, reconfirm

 

 

 

that the tools and programs to be used are

 

 

correct. Failure to use the correct tools and

 

 

 

 

 

programs may result in an accident or a fire.

 

 

 

 

 

Especially with a program in which the same

 

 

1

 

 

pattern is executed repeatedly, confirm that the

 

2

 

tool is selected correctly before starting the

 

 

 

 

second set of repetitions after the first machining.

 

Create a program after confirming the machining

 

 

 

conditions so that the heat generated by rubbing

 

 

is minimal. Creating programs without this

 

 

consideration may result in a fire or machine

 

 

damage.

 

 

NC

The conversational programming function creates

 

 

NC programs based on general machining

 

 

 

conditions, but the final responsibility for

 

 

 

determining the machining conditions rests with

 

the user. Mori Seiki is not liable for the machining

 

 

outcome of the conversational programming

 

 

 

function.

 

 

 

During and after machining, completely remove

 

 

chips if necessary. Failure to remove chips

 

completely may result in a fire, depending on the workpiece material and machining conditions.

P-4

 

FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION

4

SAFETY DEVICES

To guard operators from danger, the machine is equipped

 

with safety devices as shown below.

 

*

Door Lock System

[Emergency Stop] Button*

 

*

 

* Depending on the machine specifications, the

 

 

 

 

[Emergency Stop] button may be mounted on

 

 

 

 

the upper face of the chip conveyor.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1.

 

1.

Be ready to press the [Emergency Stop] button

2.

 

2.

during machine operation.

 

Do not place any obstacle in front of an [Emergency

3.

 

3.

Stop] button.

 

Even when the [Emergency Stop] button is pressed,

 

 

 

confirm all operations have come to a complete

4.

 

 

stop before approaching moving parts.

 

4.

Do not operate the machine with protective covers

5.

 

 

removed or while other safety devices are in invalid

 

 

status.

 

 

5.

Do not put too much confidence in safety devices,

 

 

 

protective covers and doors. This is not the

 

 

 

 

 

explosion-proof specification machine.

 

 

 

 

 

Recognition of the dangers involved in machining

 

 

 

 

 

procedures is required at all times. Dangers such

6.

 

 

 

as the ejection of a large workpiece or harmful dust

 

 

 

or an explosion caused by the machining of metals

 

 

 

such as magnesium are not preventable even if the

 

 

6.

door is closed.

 

 

If protective covers or safety devices are damaged,

 

 

 

contact the Mori Seiki Service Department.

FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION P-5

5

CAUTION LABELS

間違いなくもたらす危険

なる可能性が高い危険

物的損害のみを生じる危険

1.Observe the information on the caution labels.

2.Caution labels are marked according to the following warning levels.

DANGER: Failure to follow the instructions will result in serious injury or death.

WARNING: Failure to follow the instructions could result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION: Failure to follow the instructions could result in minor injury, or in damage to the machine.

3.Purchase a replacement caution label and re-affix in original position when a label peels off, becomes blurred and cannot be read, or a part with a label attached is replaced.

4.Ensure caution labels attached to the machine are written in the native language of the operator.

5.Contact the Mori Seiki Service Department on purchasing new caution labels and other inquiries.

" " "

Refer to MACHINE INSTALLATION GUIDE,

"

DIAGRAM "Caution Labels" for caution labels.

6

WORK ENVIRONMENT

Cover power supply cables on the floor with rigid insulated plates.

[Electric shock]

Always keep the floor area around the machine clean, without material or fluid such as water and oil remained, to ensure the work area for safe machine operations. [Tripping/Slipping]

1.Do not use a cellular phone, electrical welding equipment, or other devices that generate electromagnetic waves in the vicinity of the machine. [Unexpected machine operation]

2.Ensure that the workplace is sufficiently illuminated. [Reduced operating efficiency and safety]

3.Take care not to trip over the footswitch. [Injury]

P-6

 

FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION

7

MACHINE OPERATING PRECAUTIONS

7-1

Precautions during Machine Operation

1.Confirm all cables are properly insulated prior to machine operation.

[Electric shock]

2.Do not operate with wet hands. [Electric shock]

3.Confirm no personnel or obstacles remain inside protective covers or close to rotating or moving parts before starting machine operation. [Entanglement/Collision]

1.1. Do not change machine specifications, parameters

 

 

 

or modify the machine without prior consultation

 

 

 

with Mori Seiki.

2.

 

 

[Impaired machine performance/Machine service

 

 

2.

life reduction]

3.

 

Before using a switch, button, or key, perform

 

 

visual confirmation and then press or set decisively

 

 

 

to avoid selection errors.

 

 

3.

[Mechanical error]

4.

 

When operating noise may be produced, change

 

 

cutting conditions to limit the generation of noise or

 

 

 

ensure the operator wears protective gear to avoid

 

 

 

injury due to excessive noise levels.

 

 

 

[Impaired hearing]

 

 

4.

This is not the explosion-proof specification

5.

 

 

machine. Dangers such as the ejection of a large

 

 

workpiece or harmful dust or an explosion caused

 

 

 

by the machining of metals such as magnesium are

 

 

 

not preventable even if the door is closed. Do not

6.

 

 

rely on door and protective devices alone.

2

 

Recognition of the dangers involved in machining

 

 

5.

procedures is required at all times.

7.

 

Before operating the machine, confirm there are no

 

 

personnel or obstacles around or inside the

 

 

 

machine. Keep distance from moving parts.

8.

 

6.

[Injury/Machine damage, interference]

 

 

When the machine is operated by more than one

 

 

 

operator, cooperation and communication between

9.

 

 

them is required at all times.

 

 

7.

[Accident]

10.

 

Keep distance from spindle or other rotating parts.

 

 

8.

[Entanglement]

 

 

Wear safety glasses at all times (including

 

 

 

operators wearing prescription glasses).

 

 

9.

[Eye damage due to ejected foreign matter]

 

 

Do not wear gloves when operating the machine.

 

 

10.

[Entanglement/Machine malfunction]

 

 

Use a crane or lifter to mount or remove heavy

 

 

 

workpieces.

 

 

 

[Injury]

 

FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION

P-7

 

 

 

11.

12.

13.

14.

16.

17.20 cm

18.

ダ、その他の油圧回路の動作不良

20.

飛び出し

11.Bolts used for fixtures should be periodically replaced with the bolts specified by Mori Seiki that have appropriate strength.

[Bolt breakage/Workpiece, fixture, cutting tool ejection/Serious injuries/Machine damage]

12.Ensure workpiece, cutting tool, holder, soft jaws, and tailstock (if installed) are tightened securely. [Workpiece, cutting tool ejection]

13.Machining conditions such as depth of cut or feedrates must be set in stages with sufficient leeway during test cutting.

[Workpiece, cutting tool ejection]

14.Do not place hands or feet inside the chip conveyor (if installed) during operations.

[Entanglement]

15.Stop the machine and coolant supply before removing chips or adjusting the direction or volume of the coolant supply.

[Entanglement]

16.Remove the workpiece from the machine before deburring it by hand.

[Entanglement/Injury]

17.Always work at a safety margin of at least 20 cm from the window. This impact resistant window could be substantially deformed to ease the impact of an ejected tool, or could break if struck very hard.

[Injury]

18.When using the stopper inside the spindle, confirm the adjusting shaft does not protrude excessively from the rear of the spindle.

[Shaft ejection during spindle rotation]

19.When operating a machine equipped with a hollow chuck, install the attached through hole cover to the chuck if the through hole is not used.

[Chuck, cylinder or other hydraulic circuit malfunction due to entry of coolant or chips]

20.Contact the Mori Seiki Service Department before grinding.

[Grinding stone and cover breakage]

21.Optional specifications machines must be operated in compliance with such specifications.

<Spindle Rotation>

1.Spindle speeds must not exceed allowable speed limits of chuck, fixture and cylinder.

[Workpiece ejection]

2.Before starting the spindle, check the machining conditions.

[Workpiece ejection, Fixture damage]

3.Do not open the operator door during spindle or rotary tool rotation.

[Entanglement/Injury]

4.When starting or stopping the spindle manually, set the spindle speed setting button to the lowest, and then gradually increase or decrease the spindle speed to the required speed.

[Workpiece ejection]

5.The rotary tool spindle might not be rotated by maximum speed by conditions such as fixtures and rotary tools used even if length, the diameter, and the mass of the rotary tool are in the use limitations of the machine.

[Rotary tool ejection by rotating spindle at high speed forcibly]

P-8

 

FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION

 

 

 

粉じんの侵入

4. は、Z

7.2

10.2

ホルダとタレットヘッドの接合する2

M,S, T, G, F MDI

1.Perform spindle and controlled axis test running procedures prior to machining.

[Thermal displacement adversely affecting machining accuracy]

2.Do not touch the lamps used to illuminate the interior of the machine during machine operation or immediately following power OFF.

[Burns]

3.When machining a workpiece such as carbon or ceramics which generate powder particles, contact the Mori Seiki Service Department.

[Inhaling powder particles, Powder particles entering slideway or gap between bearing]

4.When the turret head is rotated with cutting tools mounted, ensure tools in the turret do not interfere with the Z-axis protector, before rotating the turret.

5.Support the workpiece securely before unclamping the workpiece to perform workpiece removal. [Dropped workpiece]

6.When mounting a tool on a rotary tool holder with a collet, do not tighten the collet clamping nut excessively.

[Collet clamping nut damage]

7.When tooling, ensure interference does not occur. In the case of headstock 2 specification machines, ensure interference does not occur during workpiece transfer.

8.Do not stop spindle rotation while a cutting tool is in contact with the workpiece.

[Cutting tool and machine damage]

9.Note that when an incorrect milling tool is registered, the direction of the rotary tool may be reversed when the spindle is rotated. (Milling specifications only)

[Milling tool and machine damage]

10.When mounting a rotary tool holder on the turret head with bolts on two surfaces, tighten the bolts to ensure a gap is not generated between the two contact surfaces.

[Adversely affects machining accuracy]

11.When searching for a block during the machining process and restarting machining from this point, specify the M, S, T, G and F codes, and workpiece coordinate system, etc., in MDI mode after carefully checking the status of the machine and the NC. [Unexpected machine motion]

 

FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION

P-9

7-2

Mounting and Removing Chucks

1.When mounting a chuck, chuck cylinder, or connecting rod in the spindle, read the instruction manuals of Mori Seiki, the chuck manufacturer, and the chuck cylinder manufacturer prior to performing the procedure.

[Chuck, chuck cylinder or connecting rod damage]

2.When mounting or removing a chuck, lift the unit with a crane using eyebolts and cables. Ensure eyebolts and cables are removed after the procedure.

[Entanglement/Eyebolt and cable ejection]

3.The chuck or fixture clamping the workpiece must be secured to the spindle using the threaded holes in the spindle nose.

[Chuck and fixture ejection]

4.If a workpiece holding chuck or fixture other than the chuck supplied with the machine is used, contact the Mori Seiki Service Department prior to machine operation to prevent serious injury and machine damage.

Mori Seiki is not responsible for accidents caused by the use of a chuck or fixture prepared by the customer without prior consultation.

5.If the chuck supplied with the machine is removed from the machine and a specially prepared fixture is used, remove the chuck cylinder and connecting rod.

[Connecting rod, chuck cylinder ejection]

6.Leave the pilot bush mounted in the chuck when operating the machine.

[Master jaw or chuck jaw ejection]

7.Use only specified bolts to mount the chuck and tighten to the specified torque. Check at regular intervals to ensure the bolts are securely tightened. [Workpiece ejection/Chuck damage]

P-10

 

FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION

7-3

When Chucking Workpiece

2.2

<Setting>

1.Refer to the instruction manuals prepared by the chuck and cylinder manufacturers for the allowable plunger thrust of the chuck, allowable chucking and cylinder pressures, and the relationship between the top jaw height and allowable cylinder thrust, which must be set to a value within the permissible value range. If difficult to determine, contact the Mori Seiki Service Department.

[Chuck, cylinder damage/Workpiece and jaw ejection]

2.Set the chucking pressure and tailstock spindle thrusting force (tailstock specifications only) with full consideration given to the shape and material of the workpiece to be machined and machining conditions.

[Workpiece ejection]

3.The user is responsible for setting the speed of the chuck by taking the workpiece dimensions and shapes, cutting force, and chuck maintenance and inspections into consideration. Rotate the spindle at a speed no faster than allowable values under specified conditions.

[Workpiece ejection]

<Soft Jaws>

Do not machine the counter bore depth of the soft jaw mounting bolt.

[Loosened soft jaw causing workpiece ejection] <Lifting Workpiece>

1.Only technicians qualified to operate cranes are to perform workpiece-lifting procedures. [Workpiece, Machine damage/Accident]

2.When two or more people are involved in lifting, cooperation and clear communication is necessary at all times.

[Accident]

3.Use only wires, shackles and jigs strong enough to support the total weight of the workpiece. [Dropped workpiece]

4.Before lifting a workpiece, check that is held securely.

[Workpiece ejection]

5.Raise the workpiece a short distance off the floor to confirm it is well balanced in both crosswise and lengthwise directions.

[Dropped workpiece]

 

FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION P-11

 

 

 

<Safety Precautions>

1.1. When machining long workpieces, always clamp

 

 

 

the free end of the workpiece securely with the

 

 

 

tailstock or a steady rest (if installed).

 

 

 

[Workpiece bent or shaken during spindle rotation,

2.

 

2.

ejection outside of the machine]

 

Before clamping a workpiece in the chuck, check

 

 

 

using a pressure gage that the correct hydraulic or

 

 

 

air pressure is supplied to the cylinder that actuates

3.

 

 

chuck operation.

 

3.

[Workpiece ejection]

 

 

If a gap exists between the workpiece rear surface

 

 

 

and the chuck locator face or the jaw face on which

 

 

 

the workpiece is to be seated, the workpiece

 

 

 

rotation centerline is tilted in relation to the chuck

 

 

 

rotation centerline, or if the workpiece is cast or

4.

 

 

forged, carry out test cutting at a low spindle speed

 

 

to ensure safety.

 

 

 

[Cutting force exceeds workpiece clamping

 

 

 

capacity of chuck, causing workpiece ejection]

 

 

4.

When a workpiece is eccentric, not round or the

 

 

5.

 

center of gravity of the workpiece is not at the

 

 

center of the rotation, balance using a balancer with

 

 

 

full consideration given to machining conditions

6.

 

 

such as the spindle speed.

 

5.

[Workpiece ejection]

 

 

Do not rotate the spindle without a workpiece when

 

 

 

using a balancer.

 

 

 

[Spindle bearing wear, component seizure]

 

 

6. When using a manually tightened chuck or fixture,

 

 

 

always remove the clamp handle or tightening tool

 

 

 

from the chuck or fixture after tightening.

 

 

 

[Clamp handle, tightening tool ejection]

1.1. When chucking or supporting a workpiece, take the

討してください。

プ機構の低下

rigidity of the workpiece into account when determining the chucking or supporting method and chucking pressure or tailstock thrust (if installed). [Impaired machine accuracy]

2.Do not subject the chuck jaws or workpiece to shock.

[Adversely affecting chucking accuracy, functions, and service life]

3.When leaving the machine with the power OFF for an extended period, always remove the workpiece from the clamping device.

[Dropped workpiece/Chuck and tailstock clamping mechanism service life adversely affected]

4.When clamping or unclamping the chuck, take care to ensure hands or fingers do not become caught in the chuck or chuck jaws.

[Injury]

P-12

 

FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION

7-4

Safety Practices during Setup

1.1. Implement the following safety measures when the

 

" "

 

door is shut and the door interlock function is

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

released.

 

 

 

 

<To Prevent Automatic Operation Start>

 

 

 

 

Push the mode selection button [Handle].

 

 

 

Unclamp the chuck.

 

 

 

<To Ensure Operator Safety If Automatic Operation

 

 

Is Started By Mistake>

 

 

 

 

 

Set override switches (spindle speed, rapid

 

 

 

 

traverse rate, cutting feedrate) at the lowest

 

 

 

setting.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Turn the single block function ON.

 

 

1

 

 

 

 

Turn the machine lock function ON.

 

 

 

 

 

Establish the coolant OFF mode by pressing

 

 

 

 

 

the coolant button [OFF] for longer than one

 

 

 

 

second.

 

 

 

 

 

 

<To Prevent Spindle Rotation Start>

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Unclamp the chuck.

 

 

 

Set the operation selection key-switch to the

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

[Operation Disable].

 

 

 

<To Ensure Operator Safety If The Spindle Is Started

 

 

 

By Mistake>

 

 

Set the spindle speed setting button to the

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

lowest setting.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

<To Prevent Turret Head Indexing>

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Set the [Turret Indexing] button to the

2.

 

 

 

 

station number currently indexed.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Set the operation selection key-switch to the

 

 

 

1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2.

 

[Operation Disable].

 

 

 

When using a bar feeder or bar supporter, confirm

 

2)

 

 

 

excessive vibration is not generated as follows:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1) Close the operator door with a workpiece

3.

 

 

 

 

clamped in the chuck and set the spindle

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

speed setting button to the lowest setting.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2) Rotate the spindle in manual mode and

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

gradually increase the spindle speed to the

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3.

 

maximum specified in the program.

 

 

If excessive vibration is generated, perform the

 

 

 

following countermeasures.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Correct the bend.

 

 

 

Change the maximum spindle speed used in the

 

 

 

 

 

program to a speed that does not cause

 

 

 

 

 

vibration of the machine body or the bar feeder.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Adjust the alignment of the machine and bar

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

feeder.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Check that appropriate guide bushes are used

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

in the spindle through-hole.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

If the vibration cannot be eliminated by performing

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

the countermeasures listed above, contact the Mori

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Seiki Service Department.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

[Machine damage/Machining accuracy lowered]

 

FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION P-13

7-5

Automatic Operation

1. 適切であるかを確認してから、自動運転を起動してく

がり

5.1

1.Start automatic operation after ensuring that the dry-run function is released and each override switch setting (spindle, rapid traverse, cutting traverse) is appropriate.

[Unexpected speed of spindle and each axis]

2.The length of the bar stock must be shorter than the spindle length unless a bar feeder is used. Do not insert bar stock into the spindle while the spindle is rotating.

[Spindle runout increase/Collision with bar/Bar bending]

3.Some switches have covers preventing unintentional switch actuation. Keep covers closed except when pressing the switches. If a switch cover is damaged, contact the Mori Seiki Service Department.

[Switch actuated unintentionally/Unexpected machine operation]

4.Before opening the operator door during a machining operation, make sure that the door interlock function is activated. Close the operator door before restarting the machine operation. [Serious injuries]

5.When changing the machine lock function from valid to invalid, ensure change is performed after executing a cycle.

[Gap generated between program command and machine position]

6.Confirm the cycle start indicator is extinguished and the program end indicator is illuminated before exchanging the workpieces.

[Program not completed, causing machine to start operating]

7.Before carrying out unmanned operation over extended periods, or machining using an inflammable coolant workpiece, install automatic fire extinguishing equipment.

[Fire]

1.Before mass production, check the program and perform a test cutting in single block mode. [Workpiece and cutting tool collision]

2.When machining bar stock on a machine equipped with a bar feeder or spindle through-hole, use straight bar stock only. When machining bar stock with a diameter smaller than that of the spindle (or draw bar), use a guide bush.

[Machine vibration/Impaired machine accuracy]

3.Keep the chip conveyor operating all the times during automatic operation.

[Chip accumulation causing chip conveyor damage]

4.If abnormal noise or vibration is generated during machine operation, determine the cause and take appropriate action.

[Machine damage/Impaired machining accuracy]

P-14

 

FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION

 

 

 

5. ハードオーバトラベルを解除するとき、〔第2 O.T.

り操作〔×1

5.When releasing the hard overtravel on a machine with that function, the axis movement interlock can be released by pressing the [2nd O.T. Release] button. Do not move the axis in the direction in which

the hard overtravel occurred. For safety reasons, feed the axes using the handle feed [×1] until the hard overtravel status has been canceled.

[Interference between carriage and covers]

6.If abnormal vibration or chattering is generated during machining, change machining conditions to the proper values.

[Rapid bearing damage/Cutting tool wear]

7-6

Interlock Functions

1.1. All interlock functions must be ON when operating

" "

the machine. If necessary to operate the machine

" "

with interlocks released, awareness of the dangers

 

involved and particular attention given to safety

" "

during machine operation is essential. Following

" "

completion of the operation, ensure interlocks are

turned back ON immediately.

 

[Machine operates in unexpected manner]

2.

2. Do not put too much confidence in door interlock

 

 

function. Ensure safety procedures are followed at

 

all times.

7-7

Data

1.

1. Back up stored programs, parameters set before

 

shipping and offset data.

 

[Programs destroyed, parameter data and/or offset

 

data lost]

 

Mori Seiki is not liable for problems resulting

 

from destroyed programs or lost data that have

 

not been backed up.

2.2. If necessary to perform a memory clear operation,

 

contact the Mori Seiki Service Department for assis-

 

tance.

 

[Data deleted]

 

FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION P-15

7-8

Precautions when Operating Special Specification Machines

1.NC 36 31

" " " "

3-1

4-1

4.5-1

5.6-1

<Industrial Robot Specifications>

Only qualified personnel trained and approved in accordance with local regulations may operate robots. Unauthorized personnel may not operate robots under any circumstances, including teaching and inspection. Personnel assisting robot operators must be fully qualified.

P-16

 

FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION

8 NC

NOTES CONCERNING NC PROGRAM

8-1

Cutting Conditions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

The programs given in this manual are not applicable to

 

all types of machines. Programs must be written while

 

taking the performance of the machine into consider-

 

ation and be executed with due consideration given to

 

safety. If the machine's capacity is not taken into

 

account when writing the program, the workpiece or cut-

 

ting tool may fly out during machining.

Z X XZ

For center-work machining, move the Z-axis first and then the X-axis to position the cutting tool at the approach point. In the cutting tool retraction operation, first retract the X-axis to a point where continued cutting tool movement does not interfere with the tailstock, and then move the Z-axis to the required retraction position. [Turret and tailstock interference]

8-2

After Program Input

Place the operation selection key-switch in the [Oper-

ation Enable] or [Operation Disable] position after completing program entry to prevent the program being accidentally updated.

[Unexpected machine motion]

2.G10 "00(EXT)" G54 G59

1.Do not discharge coolant when the spindle is not rotating. Take measures to ensure that coolant does not enter the spindle bearings when it is discharged while the spindle is rotating.

[Spindle damage]

2.Note that if data is set for "00(EXT)" on the WORK COORDINATES screen by specifying G10 or system variable commands, the workpiece zero point is shifted in the same direction in all of the work coordinate systems, G54 to G59.

[Tool/Turret and chuck interference, machine damage]

 

FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION P-17

9

NOTES CONCERNING MAINTENANCE

9-1

When Performing Maintenance and Inspection Procedures

1.1. Always turn the power OFF before performing main-

 

 

tenance and inspection procedures. If absolutely

 

 

 

necessary to perform procedures with power ON,

2.

 

exercise extreme caution at all times.

 

 

 

 

[Electric shock/entanglement]

3.

 

2. Never close the operator door when working inside

 

the machine with the main power switch ON.

 

 

OFF

 

[Locked/Rapid machine operations initiated unex-

 

 

 

pectedly]

 

 

 

 

 

3. Ensure the main power switch is turned [OFF] and

 

locked at all times when performing maintenance

 

" " 2-4

 

procedures considered dangerous if the power is

4.ON.

 

 

 

For details on locking the main power switch,

 

 

 

 

 

refer to "Main Power Switch" (page 2-4).

5.

" "

 

4.

When working inside the machine, the door must be

6.

 

 

 

 

open.

 

 

5.

[Locked/Injury]

 

 

Provide clear warning that the machine is being

 

 

 

maintained and operations cannot be performed.

 

 

6.

[Accident]

 

 

Before performing maintenance and inspection pro-

 

 

 

cedures inside the electrical cabinet or on motors,

7.

 

 

transformers or machine lighting, confirm the plant-

 

 

side power supply is turned OFF. Note that when

 

 

 

the main power switch is turned OFF, parts may still

8.

 

 

contain residual electrical energy. Using a tester,

 

 

 

confirm parts are free of residual energy prior to

 

 

 

performing maintenance procedures. Maintenance

 

 

 

procedures undertaken with the power turned ON

 

 

 

must be performed by qualified electrical engi-

 

 

 

neers.

9.

 

7.

[Electric shock]

 

 

Electrical wiring work is to be performed by quali-

 

 

 

fied electrical engineers only.

10.

 

8.

[Electric shock]

 

Always turn the main power switch OFF before per-

 

 

 

forming chuck mounting/removal, inspection and

 

 

 

lubrication procedures.

 

 

 

[Entanglement]

 

 

 

For details on chuck maintenance procedures,

 

 

 

refer to the instruction manuals prepared by the

 

 

 

chuck and cylinder manufacturers.

 

 

9.

Do not touch the hydraulic unit, coolant pump, sole-

 

 

 

noid valves and servomotors during, or immedi-

 

 

 

ately after operation as external surfaces reach high

 

 

 

temperature.

 

 

10.

[Burns]

 

 

Do not open electrical cabinet doors or the opera-

 

 

 

tion panel except to perform maintenance and

 

 

 

inspection procedures.

 

 

 

[Dust and moisture entry/machine damage]

P-18

 

FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION

 

 

 

11.

12.

11.Ensure the connecting rod (draw bar/tube) between the chuck and cylinder, and other threaded parts are tightened securely at all times. [Vibration/Strength reduction/Machine accuracy degradation]

12.Do not overtighten bolts. [Machine distortion/Bolt breakage]

1.1. Consult the Mori Seiki Service Department prior to

 

 

 

performing replacement procedures. Use specified

 

 

 

parts at all times.

 

 

 

[Impaired machine performance and safety]

 

 

 

Mori Seiki does not accept responsibility for

 

 

 

accidents arising from the use of non-specified

 

 

 

replacement parts or parts replaced without

2.

 

 

prior consultation.

2.

 

 

 

Stop machine operation immediately and contact

 

 

 

the Mori Seiki Service Department following

3.

 

 

malfunction of any device related to the door

 

 

interlock function.

4.

 

3.

[Injury/Machine damage]

 

Do not climb on top of the machine.

 

 

 

[Falling]

 

 

4.

Do not leave articles such as tools and rags inside

 

 

 

 

 

the machine.

 

 

 

[Entanglement in tool/Ejection from machine]

 

Do not touch chips or tool cutting edges without wearing

 

protective gloves.

 

[Injury]

9-2

Machine Management

3. の国内法にもとづいた処理をしてください。

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1.Management of keys supplied with the machine (operation panel, electrical cabinet, auxiliary devices) is the sole responsibility of the customer.

2.Keys not used on a regular basis (electrical cabinet key) must be removed from the lock and stored in a secure location.

3.Disposal of industrial waste such as oil, coolant, chips, and refrigerants is to be performed in strict compliance with safety and environmental protection laws as stipulated by the proper national and local authorities.

 

FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION P-19

9-3

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Machine Noise Data

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

9-3-1

DuraTurn 1530

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

D

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1000

 

 

 

 

1000

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1000

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1000

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

E

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

C

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Operation Panel

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1000

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A

 

B

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

DuraTurn 1530

 

 

 

DT153GA0021

 

 

 

2007/01/15

 

Model

 

 

 

Serial No.

 

 

 

Date

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6000 min−1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Max. Spindle Speed

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Specifications

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

X, Z: 24 m/min

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Rapid Traverse Rate

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Department:

Quality Assurance

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Measured by

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Section:

Value Performance

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Name:

Kazutada Hashimoto

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Measured at

 

Nara Factory Assembly Line

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Device

 

 

RION Sound Level Meter NL-26

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Frequency Characteristics

 

Nominal A Weighting Frequency Characteristics

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fast

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Level

 

 

Dynamic Response

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

61.8 dB

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Default Value

 

Background Noise

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

dB

Radiated Sound Pressure Level

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

*1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A

 

B

 

 

C

D

 

E

Measuring Point*1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ON

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

66.8

 

 

66.3

 

 

66

68

 

69.1

Machine Power ON

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6000 min1

75.8

 

 

74.1

 

 

73.1

76.2

 

79.7

When Spindle Running

(6000 min1 under no load)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

X

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

67.8

 

 

 

 

 

*2

 

X-axis

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

At Axis Travel*2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Z

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

68.4

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Z-axis

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

70.2

 

 

 

 

 

When Turret Indexing

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

*1 1 m1.55 ± 0.75 m

*2 100%

*1

Measured 1 m away from the machine and at a

 

height of 1.55 ± 0.75 m from the floor

*2

The axes travel at 100% rapid traverse rate

P-20

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

9-3-2

DuraTurn 2030

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

D

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1000

 

 

 

 

1000

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1000

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1000

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

E

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

C

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Operation Panel

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1000

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A

 

B

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

DuraTurn 2030

 

 

 

DT203FL0001

 

 

 

2007/01/05

 

Model

 

 

 

Serial No.

 

 

 

Date

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4000 min−1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Max. Spindle Speed

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Specifications

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Rapid Traverse Rate

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Department:

Quality Assurance

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Measured by

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Section:

Value Performance

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Name:

Kazutada Hashimoto

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Measured at

 

Nara Factory Assembly Line

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Device

 

 

ONO SOKKI LA-4350

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Frequency Characteristics

 

Nominal A Weighting Frequency Characteristics

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fast

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Level

 

 

Dynamic Response

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

55.4 dB

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Default Value

 

Background Noise

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

dB

Radiated Sound Pressure Level

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

*1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A

 

B

 

 

C

D

 

E

Measuring Point*1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ON

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

62.5

 

 

61.2

 

 

61.3

67.2

 

69

Machine Power ON

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4000 min1

71.8

 

 

70.8

 

 

68.1

74

 

78

When Spindle Running

(4000 min1 under no load)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

X

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

67.8

 

 

 

 

 

*2

 

 

X-axis

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

At Axis Travel*2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Z

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

67.2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Z-axis

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

68.4

 

 

 

 

 

When Turret Indexing

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

*1 1 m1.55 ± 0.75 m

*2 100%

*1

Measured 1 m away from the machine and at a

 

height of 1.55 ± 0.75 m from the floor

*2

The axes travel at 100% rapid traverse rate

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION

P-21

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

9-3-3

DuraTurn 2050

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

D

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1000

 

 

 

 

1000

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1000

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1000

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

E

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

C

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Operation Panel

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1000

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A

 

B

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

DuraTurn 2050

 

 

 

DT205FD0004

 

 

 

2006/07/17

 

Model

 

 

 

Serial No.

 

 

 

Date

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4000 min−1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Max. Spindle Speed

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Specifications

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

X, Z: 24 m/min

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Rapid Traverse Rate

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Department:

Quality Assurance

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Measured by

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Section:

Value Performance

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Name:

Kazutada Hashimoto

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Measured at

 

 

Nara Development Testing Center

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Device

 

 

RION Sound Level Meter NL-26

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Frequency Characteristics

 

Nominal A Weighting Frequency Characteristics

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fast

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Level

 

 

Dynamic Response

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

57.5 dB

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Default Value

 

Background Noise

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

dB

Radiated Sound Pressure Level

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

*1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A

 

 

B

 

 

C

D

 

E

Measuring Point*1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ON

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

61.8

 

 

62

 

 

62.9

66.1

 

67.4

Machine Power ON

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4000 min1

71.6

 

 

72.1

 

 

71.2

74

 

73.8

When Spindle Running

(4000 min1 under no load)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

X

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

64.6

 

 

 

 

 

*2

 

 

X-axis

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

At Axis Travel*2

 

Z

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

67.2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Z-axis

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

68.1

 

 

 

 

 

When Turret Indexing

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

*1 1 m1.55 ± 0.75 m

*2 100%

*1

Measured 1 m away from the machine and at a

 

height of 1.55 ± 0.75 m from the floor

*2

The axes travel at 100% rapid traverse rate

P-22

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

9-3-4

DuraTurn 2550

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

D

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1000

 

 

 

 

1000

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1000

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1000

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

E

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

C

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Operation Panel

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1000

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A

 

B

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

DuraTurn 2550

 

 

 

DT255FE0005

 

 

 

2006/07/17

 

Model

 

 

 

Serial No.

 

 

 

Date

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3000 min−1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Max. Spindle Speed

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Specifications

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

X, Z: 24 m/min

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Rapid Traverse Rate

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Department:

Quality Assurance

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Measured by

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Section:

Value Performance

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Name:

Kazutada Hashimoto

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Measured at

 

Nara Development Testing Center

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Device

 

 

RION Sound Level Meter NL-26

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Frequency Characteristics

 

Nominal A Weighting Frequency Characteristics

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fast

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Level

 

 

Dynamic Response

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

60.7 dB

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Default Value

 

Background Noise

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

dB

Radiated Sound Pressure Level

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

*1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A

 

B

 

 

C

D

 

E

Measuring Point*1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ON

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

66.6

 

 

63.1

 

 

64.1

68.1

 

67.1

Machine Power ON

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3000 min1

70.6

 

 

68.2

 

 

67.3

70.8

 

73.2

When Spindle Running

(3000 min1 under no load)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

X

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

66.4

 

 

 

 

 

*2

 

 

X-axis

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

At Axis Travel*2

 

Z

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

67.5

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Z-axis

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

69

 

 

 

 

 

When Turret Indexing

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

*1 1 m1.55 ± 0.75 m

*2 100%

*1

Measured 1 m away from the machine and at a

 

height of 1.55 ± 0.75 m from the floor

*2

The axes travel at 100% rapid traverse rate

1

CHAPTER 1 BASIC OVERVIEW

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

1-1

1

OPERATION ROUTE MAP

1-1

General Views

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

<Front View>

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

NC

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Turret

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

NC Operation Panel

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

9

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Door Interlock Key-Switch

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chuck

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Machine Operation Panel

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

NC

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

NC Power Buttons [ON]/[OFF]

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chip Conveyor

Coolant Pump

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(Chip Conveyor Specification)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Lubricating Unit

4

 

Chuck Opening/Closing Footswitch

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

8

 

 

7

 

 

CE

 

 

 

Tailstock (Tailstock Specifications)

[Door Interlock Release] Button

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(CE Specification)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

No.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Refer to

 

Component

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

 

" " 1-12 "

"ZERO RETURN OPERATION" (page

Turret

" 1-21

 

 

1-12), "TOOL MOUNTING PROCE-

 

 

 

DURE" (page 1-21)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

NC

"

 

1-8

 

"TURNING ON/OFF POWER"

 

NC Power Button [ON]/[OFF]

 

"

 

(page 1-8)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

 

" " 1-58

 

"JAW SHAPING" (page 1-58)

 

Chuck

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4

 

" " 1-54

"CHUCKING" (page 1-54)

 

Chuck Opening/Closing Footswitch

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1-2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

No.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Refer to

 

Component

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5

 

NC

 

"NC " 1-5

"NC Operation Panel" (page 1-5)

 

NC Operation Panel

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6

 

 

 

" " 1-3

"Machine Operation Panel" (page 1-3)

 

 

Machine Operation Panel

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

"Releasing Door Interlock Function"

7

 

CE

 

" " 1-19

 

 

[Door Interlock Release] button

 

 

 

 

 

(page 1-19)

 

 

(CE Specification)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

8

 

 

 

"

 

 

"TAILSTOCK (TAILSTOCK SPECIFI-

 

 

Tailstock (Tailstock Specifications)

 

 

 

" 1-73

 

CATIONS)" (page 1-73)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

9

 

 

 

" " 1-19

"Releasing Door Interlock Function"

 

 

Door Interlock Key-Switch

 

 

 

 

 

(page 1-19)

 

 

 

 

 

"

"SETTING TOOL GEOMETRY OFF-

 

 

 

 

" 1-43

SET VALUE (WITH TOOL PRESET-

 

 

Tool Presetter (Option)

 

" Z "

TER)" (page 1-43), "SETTING

 

 

 

WORKPIECE ZERO POINT (Z0)"

 

 

 

 

 

1-51

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(page 1-51)

 

 

 

 

 

<Rear View>

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

 

 

 

2

 

 

 

 

 

Electrical Cabinet

 

 

Main Power Switch

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Headstock

Chuck Cylinder

Hydraulic Unit

No.

 

 

 

 

Refer to

Component

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

 

" " 2-3

 

"Electrical Cabinet Door" (page 2-3)

Electrical Cabinet

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

 

" " 1-8

"TURNING ON/OFF POWER" (page 1-8),

Main Power Switch

"

 

2-3

 

"Electrical Cabinet Door" (page 2-3)

 

"

 

 

mori seiki DuraTurn 1530, DuraTurn 2030, DuraTurn 2050, DuraTurn 2550 User Manual

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

1-3

1-2

Machine Operation Panel

2-24 2-12

2-20

 

 

2-23

2-23

 

 

 

2-24

 

 

2-23

 

 

 

 

2-22

2-26

 

 

2 2-25

 

 

 

 

 

2-6

 

NC 2-9

 

 

2-5

 

 

NC

2

 

 

 

 

MDI

 

 

 

C1

C2

 

Y

B

 

 

C

C

C

 

 

 

 

Z

X

−B

+B

1

2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

X

Z

 

 

 

1

 

100

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

−C

+C

1

2

50

150

 

 

2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

× 1

× 10

× 100

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

X

Y

X

X

 

 

0

200%

 

 

 

 

Z

Z

 

 

 

 

 

 

C

C

100%

%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Y

ATC HP

 

 

 

2

 

 

 

 

B

 

 

 

1

3

 

−Z

 

+Z

 

 

 

 

0

100

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Y

X

 

B

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2-8

 

 

 

2-18 2-14

 

 

 

 

 

 

2-11

2-21

 

 

2-15

 

 

 

 

 

2-16

 

 

 

 

2-19

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2-20

 

 

 

 

 

1-4

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chip Conveyor Buttons

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(Chip Conveyor Specification) (page 2-24)

 

Spindle/Milling Buttons

 

 

 

[Automatic Power Shutoff] Button

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(page 2-12)

Handle Switches (page 2-20)

 

 

(page 2-23)

 

 

 

 

 

[Door Unlock] Button (page 2-24)

 

 

 

[Machine Light] Button

 

[Air Blow] Button (page 2-23)

[Emergency Stop] Button

 

 

 

 

(page 2-23)

 

 

 

[Turret Indexing]

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

[Coolant] Buttons (page 2-26)

Tailstock/Spindle 2 Buttons

 

 

 

 

 

Buttons

 

 

 

 

(page 2-25)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(page 2-22)

 

 

 

 

 

Mode Selection Buttons

 

 

 

Operation Selection

NC Function Buttons (page 2-9)

 

 

 

(page 2-6)

 

 

 

Key-Switch (page 2-5)

EMERGENCY STOP

FUNCTION

 

TAILSTOCK/2nd SPINDLE

MODE

 

CHIP CONVEYOR

PANEL

ON

OSP

BDT

PCK

 

 

MEM

MDI

TAPE

FOR

STOP

BACK

OFF

PANEL

 

 

 

/EDIT

PSM

PST

DRN

TSINC

CL

EDIT

JOG

ZRN

APF

LIGHT

AIR

SPINDLE/MILLING

HANDLE

 

 

C1

C2

Y

B

TURRET

 

C

 

TS/

C CHG

C CHG

 

2nd SP

ON

OFF THROUGH SP.

Z

X

−B

+B

1

 

2

 

 

 

DOOR UNLOCK SINGLE

% OVERRIDE

X

Z

 

 

SPCL

1

SPCL

BLOCK

100

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

MILLING

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

2

 

 

 

 

−C

+C

 

50

150

 

 

SPINDLE

2

SPINDLE

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

× 1

× 10

× 100

 

 

MRDY

MILLING

 

 

 

 

ERR

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

X

Y

X 1

X 2

OVERRIDE

 

 

 

 

0

200%

 

 

 

Z 1

Z 2

100%

 

%

CYCLE

 

 

 

 

 

 

C 1

C 2

 

 

% RAPID OVERRIDE

 

 

 

Y

ATC HP

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

 

 

 

B

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

3

−Z

 

+Z

TS/2nd SP

 

 

 

START

STOP

0

100

RPD

 

TRCL

NOR

SPJ

REV

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CHCL

 

Y

X

ONE TCH

TCL

 

 

 

ZRN

B CL

STOP

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Automatic Operation

 

Manual Pulse

[One-Touch Zero

Spindle Speed Setting

Buttons (page 2-8)

 

Generator

Return] Button

Buttons (page 2-14)

[Single Block] Button

 

 

 

(page 2-18)

 

Spindle Override Meter

 

 

(page 2-11)

 

Axis Feed Amount

[Rapid Traverse]

 

(page 2-15)

Feedrate Override Switch

 

 

 

 

 

Selection Buttons

Button

 

 

 

 

 

(page 2-19)

 

(page 2-21)

Axis Feed Buttons (page 2-16)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Axis Selection Switch

 

 

 

Rapid Traverse Rate Override Switch

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(page 2-20)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

1-5

1-3 NC

NC Operation Panel

NC "NC" 2-29

Explanation of NC Operation Panel keys can be found in "NC OPERATION PANEL" (page 2-29), MACHINE OPERATIONS. Refer to the page indicated by the number with the key name.

" " 2-30

"Program Edit Keys" (page 2-30)

" RESET " 2-31

 

" CAN " 2-32

"(RESET) Key" (page 2-31)

 

"(CAN) Key" (page 2-32)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

" " 2-32

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

"Function Selection Keys" (page 2-32)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

" HELP " 2-32

"(HELP) Key" (page 2-32)

" " 2-30

"Page Selection Keys" (page 2-30)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

" "

 

 

 

" "

"Address/Numeric keys"

 

 

 

"Cursor Control Keys"

 

" SHIFT " 2-31 " INPUT " 2-31

 

"(SHIFT) Key" (page 2-31)

"(INPUT) Key" (page 2-31)

 

 

 

NC

 

 

 

 

2. ぞれのいずれかを押すことを表します。

MDI

×1 ×1

×10 ×10

×100 ×100

3. ドットや、見る角度によって生じる色や明るさ のむらが見られることがありますが、これらは 故障ではありません。

1.In this manual, the operations by keys and buttons are indicated in the methods below.

Soft-Key

[

]

NC Operation Panel Key

(

)

Buttons/Switches

[

]

2.Selecting Automatic Mode/Manual Mode means pressing one of the buttons below. Automatic Mode:

[Memory]

[MDI]

[Tape]

Manual Mode:

[Jog]

[Zero Return] × 1 [×1]

×10 [×10]

×100 [×100]

Edit Mode:

[Edit]

3.There may be a very few dots which are (not) illuminated up all the time and irregularities of color and brightness depending on the angle on the liquid crystal display of the OPERATION PANEL screen caused during the production process, but these are not malfunctions.

1-6

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

2

OVERVIEW OF CUTTING PROCESS (LATHE)

 

<Flow of Workpiece Cutting>

1 3 Checking Drawings Chapter 1, 3

1 4 Turning ON Power Chapter 1, 4

1 12

Jaw Shaping Chapter 1, 12

1 12-1 Installing Tools for Jaw Shaping

Chapter 1, 12-1

1 9

Tool Geometry Offset Data Setting

Chapter 1, 9

Z 1 10

Setting of Workpiece Zero Point (Z-axis)

Chapter 1, 10

1 11-2 Checking/Adjusting Chuck Pressure

Chapter 1, 11-2

Completion of Jaw Shaping

1 8 Installing Tools for Workpiece Cutting

Chapter 1, 8

 

1 9

 

Tool Geometry Offset Data Setting

Chapter 1, 9

Clamping Workpiece

1 11-2 Checking/Adjusting Chucking Pressure

Chapter 1, 11-2

1 13

Setting Tailstock Chapter 1, 13

 

1 15

Inputting Program

Chapter 1, 15

1 16 No-Load Running/Program Check

Chapter 1, 16

1 17

Test Cutting Chapter 1, 17

1 18

Mass Production Chapter 1, 18

Completion of Product

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

1-7

3

CHECKING DRAWINGS

Determine the cutting method, procedures, tooling and cutting allowance (chucking side/cutting side) according to the diagrams. Refer to the checkpoints below.

 

 

Check Items

 

 

 

1.

 

The tolerance is clear.

 

 

 

2.

 

The accuracy indication is clear.

 

 

 

3.

 

The raw material configurations and materials are clear.

 

 

 

4.

 

There are not any unreasonable demands in terms of

lathe cutting accuracy.

 

 

5.

 

All the dimensions and listings in the diagrams have

been checked.

 

 

6.

 

The cutting order and cutting conditions are appropriate

 

for the workpiece material and workpiece shape.

7.

 

Cutting tools and inserts are selected properly.

 

 

 

8.

 

The cutting process is appropriate for the workpiece

material and workpiece shape.

 

 

9.

 

The method of chucking the workpiece and the setting of

 

the chucking pressure are appropriate.

10.

 

Component interference will not occur.

 

 

 

1-8

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

4

TURNING ON/OFF POWER

4-1

Power ON Sequence

1.1. When the main power switch is locked, it means that

 

 

ON

maintenance procedures are being performed. Do

 

 

 

 

 

not place the main power switch in the [ON]

2.

NC ON

position.

 

 

NC ON " 2.

After pressing the NC power button [ON], do not

 

 

"

touch any of the operation-related keys on the NC

 

 

NC

operation screen before the screen shows

 

 

"(WARNING)".

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

[Serious injuries/Machine damage]

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

" "

Refer to "General Views" (page 1-1), "Machine

 

 

 

1-1 " " 1-3

Operation Panel" (page 1-3) for the locations of

 

 

 

 

 

 

switches and buttons

 

 

 

 

 

1.

 

 

Connect the plant-side power supply (breaker).

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2.

 

 

ON

 

Turn the main power switch on the electrical cabinet to

 

 

 

 

the [ON] setting.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

NC

Press the NC power button [ON] on the operation

 

3.

 

 

 

 

panel.

 

 

 

 

 

 

[Caution Message is displayed.]

 

4.

 

 

Read the caution message thoroughly, then press the

 

 

 

 

 

[OK] soft-key.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5.

 

 

 

 

Pull out the [Emergency Stop] button.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

NC

 

Press the NC power button [ON] again.

 

6.

 

EMG

[Emergency stop state is reset. EMG display

 

 

 

 

 

 

disappears.]

 

 

 

 

 

 

Open the door, then close the door.

 

 

 

 

 

 

[Door is locked.]

 

7.

 

" "

[Status indicator "MRDY" illuminated]

 

 

 

This operation is for checking whether the

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

electrical circuit works normally.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

8.

 

 

 

 

Press the [Machine Light] button.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

1-9

4-2

Emergency Stop/To Restart Machine

合、〔非常停止〕ボタン、 RESET

停止〕ボタン、または RESET

To stop machine operation during manual or automatic operation, use one of the following three methods: press

the [Emergency Stop] button; press the (RESET) key; press the automatic operation button [Feed Hold].

As the status of the machine after stopping will differ depending on the method used, you must understand the differences between the methods.

When the [Emergency Stop] button or (RESET) key has been pressed to stop the machine during a hole machining operation, a tapping operation or thread cutting operation, carefully move the axes after checking the workpiece and cutting tool carefully for damage. [Workpiece and cutting tool may collide or interfere with each other, causing machine damage]

4-2-1

Executing an Emergency Stop with the [Emergency Stop] Button, and Canceling the Emergency Stop Status

れか1

"EMG"

Press the [Emergency Stop] button. The machine will stop.

If the machine is equipped with more than one [Emergency Stop] button, it can be stopped by pressing any of them.

<State of the Machine>

All machine operation stops regardless of the operation mode (manual or automatic).

[The message "EMG" blinks on the screen]

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Because of their inertia, the moving parts of the machine

 

may not be stopped immediately when the [Emergency

 

Stop] button is pressed. Always confirm that all opera-

 

tions have stopped before going near these parts.

 

[Entanglement]

 

The power supply to the circuits that control axis

 

movements and spindle rotation is turned off.

1-10

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

3)NC

1. "EX4002

"

" " 2-377

状態表示ランプ" "

" " 1-12

<To Restart the Machine>

1)Close the door.

2)Pull out all the [Emergency Stop] buttons.

If the machine has more than one [Emergency Stop] button, it is necessary to pull out all the buttons.

3)Press the NC power button [ON].

1. If the NC power button [ON] is pressed while the front door is open, the message "EX4002 OPEN THE DOOR THEN CLOSE" is displayed. In this case, close the front door.

2.If an alarm number is displayed on the screen, eliminate the cause of the alarm.

"TROUBLESHOOTING" (page 2-377)

[When the machine is restored to the operation ready condition, the status indicator "MRDY" is illuminated.]

4)Carry out the zero return operation.

"ZERO RETURN OPERATION" (page 1-12)

4-2-2 RESET

Executing an Emergency Stop with the (RESET) Key, and Canceling the Emergency Stop Status

RESET

Press the (RESET) key. The machine will stop.

<State of the Machine>

During automatic operation, spindle rotation and axis movement stop.

The NC is placed in the reset status.

The power is not turned off.

<To Restart the Machine>

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

To restart the program from the required block after

 

resetting the NC, check the status of the machine and

M, S, T, G, F

that of the NC and specify the M, S, T, G, and F codes, the

MDI

work coordinate system, and other necessary

 

 

 

 

information after selecting the MDI mode.

 

 

 

 

 

 

[Unexpected machine operation]

 

 

 

1)

 

 

 

1)

Turn the operation selection key-switch to

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

[Operation Enable] or [Operation & Edit Enable].

 

 

 

 

2)

 

 

2)

Press the mode selection button

[Memory].

3)

 

PROG

 

3)

Press the function selection key

(PROG).

4)

 

4)

[The PROGRAM (memory) screen is displayed.]

 

 

Press the [REWIND] soft-key.

 

 

 

5)

 

5)

[The cursor moves to the head of the program.]

 

 

 

 

Close the door.

 

 

 

6)

 

 

6)

Carry out the zero return operation.

 

 

 

 

 

" " 1-12

 

 

"ZERO RETURN OPERATION" (page 1-12)

 

 

BASIC OVERVIEW 1-11

 

 

 

4-2-3

 

 

Press the Automatic Operation Button [Feed Hold] to Execute or Cancel an Emergency Stop

1.

Press the automatic operation button [Feed Hold]. The machine will stop.

<State of the Machine>

Axis movement stops.

The spindle keeps on rotating.

The indicator above the button is illuminated

1. The power is not turned off.

2.In the thread cutting mode, when the automatic

operation button [Feed Hold] is pressed while a thread is being cut, the machine stops after executing the first block that follows the thread cutting mode blocks.

<To Restart the Machine>

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Before opening the door, select a manual mode and

 

 

 

press the spindle rotation button [Stop] to stop the

 

 

 

spindle rotation.

 

 

 

 

[Entanglement]

1)

 

 

1)

Close the door.

2)

 

 

2)

Press the automatic operation button [Cycle Start].

 

 

 

 

[The indicator above the button is illuminated./The

 

 

 

 

 

program is restarted.]

4-3

 

 

 

 

 

 

Turning OFF Power Supply

 

 

 

するためにあります。

[Emergency Stop] button are used to stop all operations in the event of an emergency. Memorize the locations of the [Emergency Stop] button to enable immediate activation from any location at any time while operating the machine.

[Serious injury/Machine damage]

1.

 

 

Press the [Emergency Stop] button.

 

 

[All operations stop.]

 

 

 

 

2.

NC

 

Press the NC power button [OFF].

 

 

[Power to the NC is turned OFF.]

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Turn the main power switch to the [OFF] setting.

3.

 

OFF

[Power to the machine is turned OFF.]

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.

 

Turn off the plant-side main circuit breaker for the

 

 

machine.

 

 

 

1-12

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

5

ZERO RETURN OPERATION

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Do not stand near moving parts of the machine during a

 

zero return operation as each axis is returned to the zero

 

point at the rapid traverse rate. Before starting a zero

 

return operation, ensure that no one is standing near the

 

moving parts and that the moving parts can be fed to the

 

zero point without interference.

 

[Serious Injury/Machine Damage]

5-1

Manual Zero Return Operation

" " 1-1 " " 1-3

Refer to "General Views" (page 1-1), "Machine Operation Panel" (page 1-3) for the locations of switches and buttons

1.

 

Set the door interlock key-switch in the [NORMAL]

 

 

 

 

position.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2.

 

 

 

 

Close the door.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3.

 

 

 

Turn the operation selection key-switch to the

 

 

 

 

 

[Operation Enable] or [Operation & Edit Enable].

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.

 

 

Press the mode selection button [Zero Return].

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Set the rapid traverse rate to be used for zero return

 

100%

operation using rapid traverse rate override switch.

5.

In the case of manual operation, rapid traverse

50%

 

 

 

 

 

rate is fixed at 50% even if the switch is set to the

 

 

 

 

 

100% setting.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Press and hold down the axis feed button in the zero

 

50%

return direction.

6.

 

[The axis approaches the machine zero point at rapid

 

 

 

 

feed rate (fixed at 50%) and status indicators for the

 

 

 

 

 

zero return of each axis are illuminated when the zero

 

 

 

 

 

return is completed.]

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

BASIC OVERVIEW 1-13

5-2

Zero Return by Pressing the [One-Touch Zero Return] Button

"" 1-3 "NC " 1-5

Refer to "Machine Operation Panel" (page 1-3), "NC Operation Panel" (page 1-5) for the locations of switches and buttons

1.

 

Set the door interlock key-switch in the [NORMAL]

 

 

 

 

position.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2.

 

 

 

 

Close the door.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3.

 

 

 

Turn the operation selection key-switch to the

 

 

 

 

 

[Operation Enable] or [Operation & Edit Enable].

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.

 

 

Press the mode selection button

[Zero Return].

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Press the [One-touch Zero Return] button.

 

 

Axes feed can be performed by pressing the

5.

 

[One-touch Zero Return]

button while the

 

door is closed. When the door is open, axes feed

 

 

 

is performed by pressing and holding down the

 

 

 

 

 

[One-touch Zero Return]

button.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1-14

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

6

OPENING/CLOSING DOOR

" "

1-3

Refer to "Machine Operation Panel" (page 1-3) for the layout of buttons and switches.

<Opening/Closing Manual Door>

 

 

<Status: Door closed, [Door Unlock] button

Open Door

 

extinguished>

1)

 

1) Press the [Door Unlock] button.

 

 

2)

 

[Button illuminated]

 

 

2) Open the door.

 

 

 

 

 

<Status: Door open, [Door Unlock] button

 

 

illuminated>

 

Close the door.

Close and

 

 

<Status: Door closed but unlocked, button

Lock Door

 

 

 

illuminated>

 

 

Press the [Door Unlock] button, or open and

 

 

close the door.

 

 

"

[Door is locked and button extinguished.]

 

 

In this manual, "Door open" means the

 

 

"

 

 

door is not locked even if the door is

 

 

" "

 

 

closed. "Door closed" means that the door

 

 

 

 

 

is closed and locked.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Under the following conditions, the door cannot be unlocked even when the [Door Unlock] button is pressed.

1.While the spindle is rotating.

2.During automatic operation.

3.During turret head indexing.

4.While the workpiece unloader is extended (work unloader specifications).

<Opening/Closing Automatic Door (Automatic Door

Type)>

 

 

 

Press the [Automatic Door Open] button, or

M85

 

 

issue an open door command (M85).

Open Door

 

 

 

 

 

[Door is automatically unlocked, and opened.]

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Press the [Automatic Door Close] button, or

 

M86

 

 

issue a close door command (M86).

Close and Lock

 

 

 

[Door is automatically closed, and locked.].

Door

 

 

 

 

 

Under the following conditions, the door cannot be opened

 

 

even by pressing the [Automatic Door Open] button.

1.

 

 

1.

While the spindle is rotating.

2.

 

 

2.

During automatic operation.

3.

 

3.

During turret head indexing.

BASIC OVERVIEW 1-15

6-1

Door Lock Prevention Key

 

As the machine is equipped with the door lock device, the

 

door is automatically locked when closed. However, the

 

door is not closed completely and not locked with the door

 

lock prevention key turned to CCW. Use the door lock

 

prevention key when performing maintenance work only.

 

Under normal conditions, remove the key at the lock

 

position and store it.

Note that the position of the door lock device varies

 

 

depending on the machine model and specifications.

 

 

 

Door Lock Prevention Key

からドアを開けることはできません。ドアロック防止キー を回してドアロックを無効にし、キーを抜き取って機内に 持ち込んでください。

When the door is closed, it is automatically locked and cannot be opened from the inside of the machine (inside of the door). Invalidate the door lock by turning the door lock prevention key; remove the key and carry it when entering the machine to perform maintenance work. [Being locked in machine/Entanglement/Serious injury]

 

<If an operator is trapped>

1)

 

1)

Press the [Emergency Stop] button regardless of the

2)

 

2)

power ON/OFF state.

 

Insert the door lock prevention key into the keyhole on

 

 

 

the outside of the door lock device and turn the key.

 

 

 

This allows the door lock to be released and the

 

 

 

operator to leave the machine.

1-16

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

7

DOOR INTERLOCK FUNCTION

 

The door interlock function is installed to ensure the safety of the operator during machine operation. The [NORMAL] and [RELEASE] settings are provided for the door interlock key-switch. [NORMAL] means normal machining operation. [RELEASE] means restricted interlock release. When it is absolutely necessary to open the door, such as during set-up operation, tool offset measurement and test cutting procedures, operate the machine in a manual mode with the key at the [RELEASE] position. Set the key to the [NORMAL] position in all the other operations.

Warning Label

Status Indicator

Never operate without safety door interlock switch

in "NORMAL" position. Failure to do so could cause serious injury or death.

DOOR INTERLOCK

NORMAL RELEASE

Door Interlock Key-Switch

(Manual Return Type)

1." "

め大変危険です。

は断線検出機能があり、異常を検出すると、NC

1.Note that releasing the door interlock function to enable limited machine operations with the door open is extremely dangerous. In daily operations, set the door interlock key-switch to [NORMAL]. Remove the key from the door interlock key-switch, and store in a safe location.

2.If an abnormality such as a disconnection of the door lock status indicator or electronic buzzer occurs, stop using the machine and contact the Mori Seiki Service Department. Since the door interlock control circuit is equipped with the disconnection detection function, the error is displayed until the NC power is shut off.

[Serious injuries/Machine damage]

が理解できる言語のものをご請求ください。

Do not remove or damage warning labels. If warning labels are damaged, lost, or are no longer legible, contact Mori Seiki to order replacement labels. Note that warning labels ordered must be written in a language understandable to the operator.

 

BASIC OVERVIEW 1-17

 

 

<Adjusting Buzzer Volume>

Open the operation panel and turn the volume adjusting knob on the back of the WARNING label using a Phillips head screwdriver.

Clockwise rotation:

Increases the volume.

Counterclockwise rotation:

Decreases the volume.

Do not decrease the volume excessively.

Volume Adjusting Knob

1-18

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

7-1

Door Interlock for Standard Specifications

 

 

The relationship between the door interlock normal/release

 

 

 

 

 

function, and operating conditions (possible/not possible) is

 

 

 

 

 

as follows:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

*1

 

Status

Operation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Door closed

All operations

 

 

 

 

 

Door interlock nor-

 

 

 

 

 

mal

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Rotation of spindle

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Turret head indexing

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Manual operations such as axis

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

feeding

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

All automatic operations

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Inching, advance and return of the

 

 

 

 

 

Door open

tailstock

 

 

 

 

 

Door interlock nor-

Chuck clamping/unclamping

 

 

 

 

 

mal

 

 

 

*2

 

 

 

(Automatic door)*2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

M code commands M00, M01, M02,

 

 

M00, M01, M02,

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

M30, M85, M86 in automatic opera-

 

 

M30, M85, M86 M

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

tion

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

*2

 

 

 

 

 

(Automatic door)*2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

M codes, S codes, T codes and axis

 

 

M

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

travel commands except M00, M01,

 

 

S T

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

M02, M30, M85, M86 in automatic

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

operation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Automatic operation while the single

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

block function is normal

 

 

MDI

 

 

 

 

 

Automatic operation while MDI mode

 

 

 

 

Door open

is selected

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Manual mode operation except axis

 

 

 

 

Door interlock

 

 

 

 

travel and turret head indexing

 

 

 

 

released

 

 

 

 

 

 

Axis travel operation with speed limi-

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

tation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Turret head indexing with index

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

speed limitation

*1

 

 

 

*1

:

Operation Possible

*2

 

*2

:

Operation Not Possible

 

 

 

 

 

(automatic door) refers to automatic door specifications

only.

 

BASIC OVERVIEW 1-19

7-2

Releasing Door Interlock Function

ロック機能有効時にドアインタロック機能を" "

クーラントの飛散、人身事故

Note that "releasing" the door interlock function while the single block function is "valid" is extremely dangerous as the door can be opened during machine operation, regardless of the [Door Unlock] button position (lock or unlock) or the mode selected. If an operation requires work to be performed with the door open during machine operation, ensure procedures are limited to those deemed absolutely necessary and are performed with extreme care at all times. [Entanglement/Collision/Workpiece, chip and coolant ejection/Serious injury]

 

1)

 

1) Press the [Door Unlock] button.

 

2)

 

 

[Button illuminated]

Releasing Door

 

2)

Open the door

Interlock

3)

 

3) Turn the door interlock key-switch to the

 

 

 

 

[RELEASE] setting.

 

 

" "

 

[Status indicator "INTERLOCK RELEASED"

 

 

 

 

flashes]

 

 

 

 

[Buzzer activated]

 

 

 

 

Upon completion of procedures

 

 

 

 

performed with the door interlock

 

 

 

 

"released", ensure the door interlock

 

 

 

 

key-switch is returned to the

 

 

 

 

[NORMAL] setting.

 

 

 

 

 

1)

 

1) Turn the door interlock key-switch to the

 

 

 

 

[NORMAL] setting.

Effecting Door

 

" "

 

[Status indicator "INTERLOCK RELEASED"

Interlock

 

 

 

extinguished]

 

 

NC

2)

[NC alarm appears on the screen]

 

2)

 

Close the door.

 

 

 

 

[Door is locked, and [Door Unlock] button

 

 

 

 

extinguished]

 

 

NC

 

[NC alarm on the screen is canceled]

 

 

 

 

All machine operations stop when

 

 

 

the door interlock key-switch is

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

turned to the [NORMAL] setting

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

while performing operations in the

 

 

 

door interlock "released" condition.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1-20 BASIC OVERVIEW

7-3

 

 

 

 

CE

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Door Interlock Function (CE Specification)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CE

The relationship between the door interlock (CE

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

specifications) normal/release function, and operating

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

conditions (possible/not possible) is as follows:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Door

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Open

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Closed

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Door Interlock

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Normal

 

 

 

Release

 

 

 

 

 

Normal

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Automatic Operation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Manual Operation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Spindle Rotation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

*1

 

 

 

 

 

 

*1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Spindle Inching

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

*2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Turret head Indexing

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

*3

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Axis Feeding

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Coolant Supply

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chip Conveyor Operation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Tailstock Advance/Return

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chuck Clamping/Unclamping

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

: Operation Possible

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

: Operation Not Possible

*1

 

30 min−1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

*1

 

Operation possible: limited to 30 min−1.

*2

 

1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

*2

 

Operation possible: single station indexing only.

*3

 

2 m/min

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

*3

 

Operation possible: limited to 2 m/min.

7-3-1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CE

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Releasing Door Interlock (CE Specifications)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1)

 

 

 

1) Turn the door interlock key-switch to the [RELEASE]

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

setting.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

" " 1-19

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

"Releasing Door Interlock Function" (page

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1-19)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2)

 

 

2) While pressing the [Door Interlock Release] button,

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

perform required manual operation.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Restricted operations performed with the

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

interlock function released are only possible

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

when the [Door Interlock Release] button is

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

pressed.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

BASIC OVERVIEW 1-21

8

TOOL MOUNTING PROCEDURE

1.1. Set the door interlock "valid" before mounting a tool

" "

or holder to the turret head.

 

[Entanglement/Collision/Serious injury]

2.2. When loosening bolts on tool holders and cutting

 

 

tool s, adopt a balanced stance and then loosen the

 

 

bolts gradually.

3.

 

[Unexpected contact with machine parts/Serious

 

 

injury]

 

 

3. The turret head starts to rotate when the [Turret

4.

 

Indexing] button is pressed. Take care to avoid

 

pressing the [Turret Indexing] button in error.

 

 

[Unexpected rotation/Serious injury/Machine

 

 

damage]

 

 

4. When using jigs for mounting tools on the turret

 

 

head or holders, measure the dimensions or shape

 

 

 

of the jigs and then adjust them so that the center

 

 

 

height of the tools is compatible with the

 

 

 

 

specifications of the turret head or holder. After

 

 

mounting the tools, confirm that they are firmly

 

 

secured on the turret head or holder.

 

 

[Tool ejection]

In center-work operation, the tools or holders adjacent to the tool used may interfere with the tailstock in cases such as machining a workpiece with a small machining diameter. When mounting tools or holders, confirm that there will be no interference between the tailstock and the adjacent tools or holder. (Tailstock specifications) [Interference between tailstock and adjacent tools or holder, machine damage]

1-22

 

 

 

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

1.

 

 

Prepare necessary holders and tools.

 

 

Preparing

 

"

Separate volume, MACHINE

 

Tools

 

 

 

"

 

INSTALLATION GUIDE, DIAGRAMS

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

"TOOLING SYSTEM DIAGRAMS"

2.

 

Prior to rotating the turret head, use a manual

 

 

mode to move the turret to a position out of

 

Moving

 

 

range of interference between tools and other

 

Turret

 

 

 

components.

 

3.

 

1)

 

 

1) Close the door

 

 

 

2)

 

2) Turn the operation selection key-switch to

 

 

 

 

 

 

the [Operation Enable] or

 

 

Indexing

 

 

 

 

 

 

[Operation & Edit Enable].

 

 

Turret Head

 

 

 

 

3)

 

 

 

 

 

3) Display the turret number which precedes

 

 

 

1 2

by 1 or 2 before the turret number on which

 

 

 

 

the tool holder is to be mounted by pressing

 

 

 

 

 

the [Turret Station Setting]

button.

 

 

4)

 

 

 

[Number flashing]

 

 

 

 

 

 

4) Press the [Turret Indexing]

button.

 

 

 

 

 

TURRET

 

 

 

 

 

 

Turret Indexing Button

 

 

[Turret Selection]

buttons

 

 

 

 

are not used with this machine.

 

The instructions from here on differ depending on the

 

 

machine model. Make sure that you are referring to

 

 

the appropriate instructions for your machine model.

 

BASIC OVERVIEW 1-23

8-1 DuraTurn 1530

DuraTurn 2030, DuraTurn 2050, DuraTurn 2550"DuraTurn 2030, DuraTurn 2050, DuraTurn 2550" 1-33

For tool mounting procedures for DuraTurn 2030, DuraTurn 2050, DuraTurn 2550, refer to "DuraTurn 2030, DuraTurn 2050, DuraTurn 2550" (page 1-33)

8-1-1 DuraTurn 1530

When Mounting the Cutting Tools Directly on the Turret Head (DuraTurn 1530)

4.

□ 20

Mount a 20 mm × 20 mm qualified tool directly

 

 

onto the turret head by using a clamping block

Mounting

 

and clamping gib as shown in the diagram

Tool

 

 

below.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

±0.08

 

Right-hand

 

25

Clamping Block

cutting tool

 

 

 

 

 

 

20

 

20

 

 

 

 

 

 

125 ± 0.08

 

 

 

 

 

30

 

 

 

 

125

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Clamping Gib

 

 

1) M6 × 25 2

1) Fix the cutting tool in the cutting tool fixing

 

 

 

groove with a clamping block and two M6 ×

 

 

 

25 hexagon socket head cap screws.

 

 

2 3

Tighten the bolts loosely by turning

 

 

 

them just two or three turns.

 

 

 

Cutting Tool Fixing Groove

 

 

 

Clamping Block

 

 

 

 

Positioning Key

M6 × 25

 

M6 × 25 Hexagon Socket

Turret Head

Head Cap Screws

 

 

 

 

1-24

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

 

 

 

4.2)

 

 

Mounting

Tool

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2)Fix the cutting tool in the cutting tool fixing groove.

Make sure that cutting tool fixing direction is correct.

Cutting Tool

3)Fix the clamping gib in the direction shown in the figure.

Insert the clamping gib in the direction shown in the figure below.

When the gib is set in wrong direction, the cutting tool cannot be secured by the clamping block.

[Tool ejection, serious injury, machine damage]

Clamping Gib

Cutting Tool

Turret Head

 

Clamping Block

 

Clamping Gib

 

 

BASIC OVERVIEW 1-25

 

 

4.4)

 

 

Mounting

 

Tool

 

 

 

5)M6 × 25 2

□ 20 20 mm

M6 × 25

6)M8 × 20 1

M8 × 20

4)Push the clamping block in with your fingers, in the direction shown by the arrow in the diagram below.

Clamping Block

5)Tighten the two M6 × 25 hexagon socket head cap screws equally.

Adjust the center height to 20 mm to mount cutting tools other than

20 mm × 20 mm qualified tools.

M6 × 25

Hexagon Socket

Head Cap Screws

Hexagonal Wrench

6)Fix the coolant guide block with an M8 × 20 hexagon socket head cap screws.

Coolant Discharging Outlet

Coolant Guide

Block

M8 × 20

Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws

1-26

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

 

 

 

Mounting Tool

1)M6 × 25 2

M6 × 25

2)M6

M6

<Removing the Cutting Tool>

1)Fully unscrew the two M6 × 25 hexagon socket head cap screws.

M6 × 25

Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws

Turret Head

Hexagonal Wrench

2)Screw an M6 hexagon socket head cap screws into the threaded hole in the center of the clamping block to loosen the clamping block.

Clamping Block

M6 Hexagon Socket

Head Cap Screws

3)Remove the cutting tool.

Be careful not to drop the cutting tool. [Cutting tool and machine damage]

 

Cutting Tool

 

 

 

 

 

BASIC OVERVIEW 1-27

 

 

 

 

 

 

8-1-2

DuraTurn 1530

 

 

 

 

When Mounting the Cutting Tools in Tool Holders (DuraTurn 1530)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.

 

1)

 

1) Clean the contact surfaces of the turret

 

 

 

 

 

head and holder using waste cloth.

 

 

Before

2)

 

2) Adjust the coolant hole position to conform

 

 

Mounting

 

 

to the tool holder mounting direction.

 

 

Holder

 

5.

 

Refer to the step 5.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5.

 

 

<Mounting Holder>

 

 

 

1)

 

1) Set the tool holder in position in alignment

 

 

 

 

 

with the positioning key on the turret head.

 

 

Mounting

2)

 

2) Tighten the bolts in diagonal order to ensure

 

 

Holder and

 

 

the contact surfaces adhere firmly.

 

 

Tool

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1.

 

1. Ensure no chips are trapped when

 

 

 

 

 

mounting holders and tools.

 

 

 

 

 

[Turret head scratching/Tool tilting/

 

 

 

 

 

Machining defects]

 

 

 

2.

 

2. Remove scratches on the turret head

 

 

 

 

 

mounting surface using an oil whet-

 

 

 

3.

 

stone.

 

 

 

 

 

3. Tighten bolts with a consistent tighten-

 

 

 

4.

 

ing torque.

 

 

 

 

 

[Sub-standard machining accuracy]

 

 

 

 

4. Screw a coolant discharge port plug

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

into the turret stations where a holder is

 

 

 

 

 

not mounted.

 

 

 

 

 

[Obstructed coolant supply/Tool dam-

 

 

 

 

 

age/Sub-standard machining accuracy]

 

 

 

 

<Mounting Tool>

 

 

 

 

Mount the tool and appropriate tool tip in a holder.

 

 

 

 

Separate volume, MACHINE INSTAL-

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

LATION GUIDE, DIAGRAMS

 

 

 

 

" "

"TOOLING SYSTEM DIAGRAMS"

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1.

 

1. Ensure tools and holders do not inter-

 

 

 

 

 

fere with workpieces and machine com-

 

 

 

 

1 1-32

ponents, and the tool holder

 

 

 

 

arrangement on the turret is balanced.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

See Diagram 1 (page 1-32).

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

[Interference/Machine damage]

 

 

 

2.

 

 

 

 

2. When mounting an I.D. cutting tool on

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

the turret head, ensure the tool shank

 

 

 

 

2 1-32

 

 

 

 

does not protrude from the rear of the

 

 

 

3.

 

tool holder. See Diagram 2 (page 1-32).

 

 

 

 

[Interference/Machine damage]

 

 

 

 

 

3. Do not mount or remove tools or hold-

 

 

 

 

 

ers with excessive force. Do not strike

 

 

 

 

 

a wrench or spanner to tighten or

 

 

 

 

 

loosen the holders and bolts.

 

 

 

4.

 

[Damage to inside of machine]

 

 

 

 

 

4. Confirm that tools to be mounted do not

 

 

 

 

 

exceed the maximum, overhang.

 

 

 

 

 

[Interference/Tools and machine dam-

 

 

 

 

 

age]

 

 

 

 

 

 

For the maximum overhang,

 

 

 

 

" "

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

refer to the separate volume,

 

 

 

 

 

 

MACHINE INSTALLATION

 

 

 

 

 

 

GUIDE, DIAGRAMS "AXIS

 

 

 

 

 

 

TRAVEL DIAGRAMS".

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1-28

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

 

 

 

5.<FaceWork>and O.D. Cutting Tool for Center-

 

□ 20

Adjust the center height to 20 mm to

 

Mounting

20 mm

 

mount cutting tools other than 20 mm

×

Holder and

 

20 mm qualified tools.

 

Tool

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

M12 × 35

 

 

R65012

M12 × 35 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws

 

 

 

 

 

Coolant Discharging Outlet (R65012)

 

 

 

 

T00078 [T00079]

 

 

□ 20

 

 

 

20 mm × 20 mm Qualified Tool

 

 

 

 

M10

[ ]

 

M10 Hexagon Socket Set Screw

B43166

[ ]: Inch Specification

 

Clamping Block (B43166)

 

 

 

 

 

<Face and I.D. Cutting Tool>

□ 20

Adjust the center height to 20 mm to

20 mm

mount cutting tools other than 20 mm ×

 

 

20 mm qualified tools.

 

 

 

□ 20

20 mm × 20 mm Qualified Tool

M12 × 60

M12 × 60 Hexagon Socket

Head Cap Screws

B43166

Clamping Block (B43166)

T00080 [T00081]

M8

M8 Hexagon Socket Set Screw

R65012

[ ]

Coolant Discharging Outlets (R65012)

[ ]: Inch Specification

 

 

BASIC OVERVIEW 1-29

 

 

Mounting Holder and Tool

φ32

<32-mm Dia. I.D. Cutting Tool>

 

 

M12 × 60

M12 × 60 Hexagon Socket

Head Cap Screws

T10046 [T10047]

 

 

 

 

 

I.D. Cutting Tool

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

M8

 

 

 

M8 Hexagon Socket Set Screw

 

R65012

 

Coolant Discharging Outlets (R65012)

 

 

 

 

[ ]

 

 

 

 

[ ]: Inch Specification

φ25

<I.D. Cutting Tool Smaller than 25-mm Dia.>

* φ8

*

When the boring bar sleeve is

 

M6

 

 

8-mm dia., M6 screws are used.

 

 

 

M12 × 60

 

 

 

M12

× 60 Hexagon Socket

R65012

 

Head Cap Screws

 

 

 

Coolant Discharging Outlets (R65012)

 

 

T10046 [T10047]

2

 

 

 

Boring Bar Sleeve (2)

 

 

 

1

 

 

 

 

Boring Bar Sleeve (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

I.D. Cutting Tool

 

 

M8

 

 

 

M8 Hexagon Socket Set Screw

 

 

 

M8*

 

 

 

M8* Hexagon Socket Set Screw

1

2

[ ]

Boring Bar Sleeve (1)

Boring Bar Sleeve (2)

 

[ ]: Inch Specification

T20122 (φ25) [T20123 (φ1")]

T20192 (φ20) [T20193 (φ3/4")]

 

T20120 (φ20) [T20121 (φ3/4")]

T20130 (φ16) [T20131 (φ5/8")]

 

T20118 (φ16) [T20119 (φ5/8")]

T20128 (φ12) [T20129 (φ1/2")]

 

T20116 (φ12) [T20117 (φ1/2")]

T20126 (φ10) [T20127 (φ3/8")]

 

T20114 (φ10) [T20115 (φ3/8")]

T20124 (φ8)

 

 

 

T20112 (φ8)

 

 

 

 

1-30

 

 

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

5.

 

MT1, MT2

<MT1, MT2 Morse Taper Shank Drill>

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Mounting

 

 

M12 × 60

 

Holder and

 

 

M12 × 60 Hexagon Socket

 

Tool

 

 

Head Cap Screws

 

 

 

 

 

 

T10046 [T10047]

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Drill Socket

 

 

 

 

T22048 (MT2) [T22049]

 

 

 

 

T22050 (MT1) [T22051]

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Morse Taper Shank Drill

 

M8

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

M8 Hexagon Socket Set Screw

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Coolant Discharging Outlets

 

 

 

R65012:

T10046 [T10047]

 

 

 

 

[ ]

 

 

 

 

[ ]: Inch Specification

 

 

 

<Throw-Away Drill>

 

 

M12 × 60

F70046

 

 

M12 × 60 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws

Cover (F70046)

 

 

M10

M5 × 12

 

 

M10 Hexagon Socket Set Screw

 

 

 

φ32

 

M5 × 12

 

 

 

Hexagon Socket

 

 

φ32 Throw-Away Drill

 

Head Cap Screws

 

 

 

 

T13066 [T13067]

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Throw-Away Drill Socket

 

 

 

T22054 (φ25) [T22055 (φ1")]

 

 

 

T22052 (φ20) [T22053 (φ3/4")]

 

 

 

T22068 (φ16)

 

 

 

φ25

[ ]

 

 

φ25 or Smaller Throw-Away Drill

 

 

 

 

[ ]: Inch Specification

 

BASIC OVERVIEW 1-31

 

 

Mounting Holder and Tool

1) 六角穴付きボルトM12 × 65 1 M12 × 40 1

T00094 [T00095]

M12 × 65

M12 × 40

<Cut-Off Tool

(Work Unloader Specifications)>

When cutting off a workpiece on a machine equipped with the work unloader, always use a cut-off tool holder. If the cut-off tool is mounted directly on the turret head without using a cut-off tool holder, the work unloader may interfere with the tool holders mounted at other turret stations, causing damage to the machine.

1)Fix the cut-off tool holder on the turret head with an M12 × 65 hexagon socket head cap screw and an M12 × 40 hexagon socket head cap screw.

Turret Head

T00094 [T00095]

M12 × 65

Hexagon Socket

Head Cap Screw

M12 × 40 Hexagon Socket

Head Cap Screw

2)Fix the cut-off tool in the groove of the cutoff tool holder.

Make sure that cut-off tool fixing direction is correct.

Cut-Off Tool

1-32

 

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5.

 

3) M6 × 18 2

3) Tighten the two M6 × 18 hexagon socket

 

 

 

 

head bolts equally to secure the cut-off tool.

 

 

 

□ 20

Adjust the center height to 20 mm to

 

 

Mounting

 

 

Holder and

20 mm

mount cutting tools other than

 

 

Tool

 

20 mm × 20 mm qualified tools.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

M6 × 18

 

 

M6 × 18

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Hexagon Socket

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Set Screw

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4)

 

4) Mount a pipe on the coolant discharging

 

5)

 

outlet of the turret head.

 

 

5) Adjust the angle of the pipe so that coolant

 

 

 

will be supplied to the tip of the cut-off tool.

6.

 

When mounting several tools, index the turret

 

 

head and mount the next tool.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Mounting

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Next Holder

 

When indexing or rotating the turret head

and Tool

Z

with cutting tools mounted, exercise

 

 

 

extreme caution to ensure tools do not

 

1

interfere with machine components such

 

 

as the Z-axis protector. See Diagram 1.

 

 

 

 

 

 

[Interference/Machine damage]

Turret Head

Turret Head

Turret Base

Z

 

 

Z-Axis Protector

 

 

 

 

 

I.D. Cutting Tool

 

Interference

 

Interference

 

 

1

 

2

Diagram 1

 

Diagram 2

BASIC OVERVIEW 1-33

8-2 DuraTurn 2030, DuraTurn 2050, DuraTurn 2550

DuraTurn 1530

For tool mounting procedures for DuraTurn 1530,

"DuraTurn 1530" 1-23

refer to "DuraTurn 1530" (page 1-23)

8-2-1 DuraTurn 2030, DuraTurn 2050, DuraTurn 2550

When Mounting the Cutting Tools Directly on the Turret Head (DuraTurn 2030, DuraTurn 2050, DuraTurn 2550)

Mounting Tool

□ 25

Mount a 25 mm × 25 mm qualified tool directly

 

onto the turret head by using a clamping block

 

 

and clamping gib as shown in the diagram

 

 

below.

 

 

 

 

 

0.08

 

Right-hand

±

cutting tool

Clamping Block

32

 

 

 

 

 

25

 

25

 

 

 

150 ± 0.08

 

 

 

 

 

 

40

 

 

150

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Clamping Gib

 

1)M8 × 30 2

2 3

M8 × 30

 

1)Fix the cutting tool in the cutting tool fixing groove with a clamping block and two M8 × 30 hexagon socket head cap screws.

Tighten the bolts loosely by turning them just two or three turns.

Cutting Tool Fixing Groove

Clamping Block

Positioning Key

M8 × 30 Hexagon Socket

Turret Head

Head Cap Screws

 

1-34

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

 

 

 

4.2)

 

 

Mounting

Tool

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2)Fix the cutting tool in the cutting tool fixing groove.

Make sure that cutting tool fixing direction is correct.

Cutting Tool

3)Fix the clamping gib in the direction shown in the figure.

Insert the clamping gib in the direction shown in the figure below.

When the gib is set in wrong direction, the cutting tool cannot be secured by the clamping block.

[Tool ejection, serious injury, machine damage]

Clamping Gib

Cutting Tool

Turret Head

 

Clamping Block

 

Clamping Gib

 

 

BASIC OVERVIEW 1-35

 

 

4.4)

 

 

Mounting

 

Tool

 

 

 

5)M8 × 30 2

□ 25 25 mm

M8 × 30

6)M8 × 20 1

M8 × 20

4)Push the clamping block in with your fingers, in the direction shown by the arrow in the diagram below.

Clamping Block

5)Tighten the two M8 × 30 hexagon socket head cap screws equally.

Adjust the center height to 25 mm to mount cutting tools other than

25 mm × 25 mm qualified tools.

M8 × 30

Hexagon Socket

Head Cap Screws

Hexagonal Wrench

6)Fix the coolant guide block with an M8 × 20 hexagon socket head cap screws.

Coolant Discharging Outlet

Coolant Guide

Block

M8 × 20

Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws

1-36

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

 

 

 

Mounting Tool

1)M8 × 30 2

M8 × 30

2)M8

M8

<Removing the Cutting Tool>

1)Fully unscrew the two M8 × 30 hexagon socket head cap screws.

M8 × 30

Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws

Turret Head

Hexagonal Wrench

2)Screw an M8 hexagon socket head cap screws into the threaded hole in the center of the clamping block to loosen the clamping block.

Clamping Block

M8 Hexagon Socket

Head Cap Screws

3)Remove the cutting tool.

Be careful not to drop the cutting tool. [Cutting tool and machine damage]

 

Cutting Tool

 

BASIC OVERVIEW 1-37

8-2-2 DuraTurn 2030, DuraTurn 2050, DuraTurn 2550

When Mounting the Cutting Tools in Tool Holders (DuraTurn 2030, DuraTurn 2050, DuraTurn 2550)

4.

 

1)

 

1)

Clean the contact surfaces of the turret

 

 

 

 

 

head and holder using waste cloth.

 

Before

2)

 

2)

Adjust the coolant hole position to conform

 

Mounting

 

 

 

to the tool holder mounting direction.

 

Holder

 

5.

 

 

Refer to the step 5.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5.

 

 

<Mounting Holder>

 

 

1)

 

1)

Set the tool holder in position in alignment

 

 

 

 

 

with the positioning key on the turret head.

 

Mounting

2)

 

2)

Tighten the bolts in diagonal order to ensure

 

Holder and

 

 

 

the contact surfaces adhere firmly.

 

Tool

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1. Ensure no chips are trapped when

 

 

 

 

 

mounting holders and tools.

 

 

 

 

 

[Turret head scratching/Tool tilting/

 

 

2.

 

 

Machining defects]

 

 

 

2. Remove scratches on the turret head

 

 

 

 

 

mounting surface using an oil whet-

3.stone.

 

 

3. Tighten bolts with a consistent tighten-

4.

 

ing torque.

 

 

[Sub-standard machining accuracy]

 

 

4. Screw a coolant discharge port plug

 

 

into the turret stations where a holder is

 

 

not mounted.

 

 

[Obstructed coolant supply/Tool dam-

 

 

age/Sub-standard machining accuracy]

 

<Mounting Tool>

 

Mount the tool and appropriate tool tip in a holder.

 

Separate volume, MACHINE INSTAL-

 

 

 

 

LATION GUIDE, DIAGRAMS

 

" "

"TOOLING SYSTEM DIAGRAMS"

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1.

 

1. Ensure tools and holders do not inter-

 

 

fere with workpieces and machine com-

 

1 1-32

ponents, and the tool holder

 

 

arrangement on the turret is balanced.

 

 

See Diagram 1 (page 1-32).

 

[Interference/Machine damage]

2.

 

2. When mounting an I.D. cutting tool on

 

 

 

2 1-32

the turret head, ensure the tool shank

 

does not protrude from the rear of the

 

 

3.

tool holder. See Diagram 2 (page 1-32).

 

[Interference/Machine damage]

 

 

3. Do not mount or remove tools or hold-

 

 

 

ers with excessive force. Do not strike

 

 

a wrench or spanner to tighten or

4.

 

loosen the holders and bolts.

 

[Damage to inside of machine]

 

 

4. Confirm that tools to be mounted do not

 

 

exceed the maximum, overhang.

 

 

[Interference/Tools and machine damage]

 

 

For the maximum overhang,

 

 

 

 

" "

 

refer to the separate volume,

 

 

 

MACHINE INSTALLATION

 

 

 

GUIDE, DIAGRAMS "AXIS

 

 

 

TRAVEL DIAGRAMS".

1-38

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

 

 

 

5.<FaceWork>and O.D. Cutting Tool for Center-

 

1.

 

1. When mounting the holder T00074

Mounting

 

 

Holder and

 

T00074

to the turret head station with the

Tool

 

B44088 M8 × 25

groove for cutting tool, mount the

 

block B44088 to the holder with two

 

 

2

 

 

M8 × 25 hexagon socket head cap

 

 

 

 

 

screws.

 

2.

□ 25

 

2. Adjust the center height to 25 mm to

 

 

 

 

 

mount cutting tools other than

 

 

25 mm

 

 

25 mm × 25 mm qualified tools.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

M12 × 35

 

 

R65012

M12 × 35 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws

 

 

 

 

 

Coolant Discharging Outlet (R65012)

 

 

 

 

 

T00074 [T00075]

 

□ 25

 

 

 

25 mm × 25 mm Qualified Tool

 

 

 

 

 

 

B44088

 

 

 

 

Block (B44088)

 

 

 

 

M10

 

[ ]

 

M10 Hexagon Socket Set Screw

 

B44047

 

[ ]: Inch Specification

 

 

 

Clamping Block (B44047)

 

 

 

<Face and I.D. Cutting Tool>

 

□ 25

Adjust the center height to 25 mm to

 

25 mm

mount cutting tools other than 25 mm ×

 

 

 

25 mm qualified tools.

 

 

□ 25

 

 

 

25 mm × 25 mm Qualified Tool

M12 × 75

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

M12 × 75 Hexagon Socket

 

 

 

 

Head Cap Screws

 

 

 

 

B44047

 

 

 

 

Clamping Block (B44047)

T00068 [T00069]

M10

M10 Hexagon Socket Set Screw

R65005

[ ]

Coolant Discharging Outlets (R65005)

[ ]: Inch Specification

 

 

BASIC OVERVIEW 1-39

 

 

Mounting Holder and Tool

φ40, φ45, φ50

<40-, 45or 50-mm Dia. I.D. Cutting Tool>

 

 

 

M12 × 70

 

 

 

M12 ×

70 Hexagon Socket

T10036 (φ40) [T10037 (φ1 1/2")]

 

Head Cap Screws

T10040 (φ45) [T10041 (φ1 3/4")]

 

 

 

T10044 (φ50) [T10045 (φ2")]

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

I.D. Cutting Tool

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

M10

 

 

 

M10 Hexagon Socket Set Screw

 

 

 

 

Coolant Discharging Outlets

 

R65005:

T10036 [T10037]

 

R65012:

T10040 [T10041], T10044 [T10045]

 

 

 

 

[ ]

 

 

 

 

[ ]: Inch Specification

φ32

<I.D. Cutting Tool Smaller than 32-mm Dia.>

* φ8

*

When the boring bar sleeve is

 

M6

 

 

8-mm dia., M6 screws are used.

 

 

 

M12 × 70

 

 

 

M12

× 70 Hexagon Socket

R65005

 

Head Cap Screws

 

 

 

Coolant Discharging Outlets (R65005)

 

 

T10036 [T10037]

2

 

 

 

Boring Bar Sleeve (2)

 

 

 

1

 

 

 

 

Boring Bar Sleeve (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

I.D. Cutting Tool

 

 

M10

 

 

 

M10 Hexagon Socket Set Screw

 

 

 

M8*

 

 

 

M8* Hexagon Socket Set Screw

1

2

[ ]

Boring Bar Sleeve (1)

Boring Bar Sleeve (2)

 

[ ]: Inch Specification

T20098 (φ32) [T20099 (φ1 1/4")]

T20216 (φ25) [T20217 (φ1")]

 

T20096 (φ25) [T20097 (φ1")]

T20196 (φ20) [T20197 (φ3/4")]

 

T20094 (φ20) [T20095 (φ3/4")]

T20194 (φ16) [T20195 (φ5/8")]

 

T20092 (φ16) [T20093 (φ5/8")]

T20110 (φ12) [T20111 (φ1/2")]

 

T20090 (φ12) [T20091 (φ1/2")]

T20108 (φ10) [T20109 (φ3/8")]

 

T20088 (φ10) [T20089 (φ3/8")]

T20106 (φ8)

 

 

 

T20086 (φ8)

 

 

 

 

1-40

 

 

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

5.

 

MT1, MT2, MT3, MT4

<MT1, MT2, MT3 or MT4 Morse Taper Shank

 

 

 

Drill>

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Mounting

T10036 (φ40) [T10037 (φ1 1/2")]

M12 × 70

 

Holder and

 

T10044 (φ50) [T10045 (φ2")]

M12 × 70 Hexagon Socket

 

Tool

Head Cap Screws

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Drill Socket

 

 

 

 

T22066 (MT1) [T22067]

 

 

 

 

T22046 (MT2) [T22047]

 

 

 

 

T22042 (MT3) [T22043]

 

 

 

 

T22044 (MT4) [T22045]

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Morse Taper Shank Drill

 

M10

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

M10 Hexagon Socket Set Screw

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Coolant Discharging Outlets

 

 

 

R65005:

T10036 [T10037]

 

 

 

R65012:

T10044 [T10045]

 

 

 

 

[ ]

 

 

 

 

[ ]: Inch Specification

 

 

 

<Throw-Away Drill>

 

 

M12 × 70

F70031

 

 

M12 × 70 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screws

Cover (F70031)

 

 

M10

M6 × 12

 

 

M10 Hexagon Socket Set Screw

 

 

 

φ40

 

M6 × 12

 

 

 

Hexagon Socket

 

 

φ40 Throw-Away Drill

 

Head Cap Screws

 

 

 

 

T13064

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Throw-Away Drill Socket

 

 

 

T20100 (φ32) [T20101 (φ1 1/4")]

 

 

 

T20102 (φ25) [T20103 (φ1)]

 

 

 

T20104 (φ20) [T20105 (φ3/4")]

 

 

 

T20190 (φ16)

 

 

 

φ32

[ ]

 

 

φ32 or Smaller Throw-Away Drill

[ ]: Inch Specification

 

BASIC OVERVIEW 1-41

 

 

Mounting Holder and Tool

1) 六角穴付きボルトM12 × 65 1 M12 × 40 1

T00144

M12 × 65

M12 × 40

<Cut-Off Tool

(Work Unloader Specifications)>

When cutting off a workpiece on a machine equipped with the work unloader, always use a cut-off tool holder. If the cut-off tool is mounted directly on the turret head without using a cut-off tool holder, the work unloader may interfere with the tool holders mounted at other turret stations, causing damage to the machine.

1)Fix the cut-off tool holder on the turret head with an M12 × 65 hexagon socket head cap screw and an M12 × 40 hexagon socket head cap screw.

Turret Head

T00144

M12 × 65

Hexagon Socket

Head Cap Screw

M12 × 40 Hexagon Socket

Head Cap Screw

2)Fix the cut-off tool in the groove of the cutoff tool holder.

Make sure that cut-off tool fixing direction is correct.

Cut-Off Tool

1-42

 

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5.

 

3) M6 × 18 2

3) Tighten the two M6 × 18 hexagon socket

 

 

 

 

head bolts equally to secure the cut-off tool.

 

 

 

□ 25

Adjust the center height to 25 mm to

 

 

Mounting

 

 

Holder and

25 mm

mount cutting tools other than

 

 

Tool

 

25 mm × 25 mm qualified tools.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

M6 × 18

 

 

 

M6 × 18

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Hexagon Socket Set Screw

 

4)

 

4) Mount a pipe on the coolant discharging

 

5)

 

outlet of the turret head.

 

 

5) Adjust the angle of the pipe so that coolant

 

 

 

will be supplied to the tip of the cut-off tool.

6.

 

When mounting several tools, index the turret

 

 

head and mount the next tool.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Mounting

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Next Holder

 

When indexing or rotating the turret head

and Tool

Z

with cutting tools mounted, exercise

 

 

 

extreme caution to ensure tools do not

 

1

interfere with machine components such

 

 

as the Z-axis protector. See Diagram 1.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

[Interference/Machine damage]

Turret Head

Turret Head

Turret Base

Z

 

 

Z-Axis Protector

 

 

 

 

 

I.D. Cutting Tool

 

Interference

 

Interference

 

 

1

 

2

Diagram 1

 

Diagram 2

 

BASIC OVERVIEW 1-43

9

SETTING TOOL GEOMETRY OFFSET VALUE (WITH TOOL PRESETTER)

用して、工具形状オフセット値を設定する方法について説 明します。

This section describes the procedures for setting the tool offset value using a manual in-machine tool presetter (option).

2.

治具の干渉、機械の破損

1.

2.2

1.While the conditions below are satisfied, do not

press the [Presetter Measurement] button without cutting the workpiece end face.

The presetter arm is removed from the base.

The protective cover is installed on the base.

The indicator in the [Presetter Mode] button is illuminated.

If the [Presetter Measurement] button is pressed in this state, the work shift data cannot be set correctly. If the program is executed while the input work shift data is incorrect, the tool, tool holder, and/ or the turret head will strike the workpiece, chuck, or fixture, damaging the machine, or the tool may not reach the workpiece.

[Machine damage]

2.Never attempt to mount or remove the presetter arm in the presetter mode (when the indicator in the [Pre-

setter Mode] button is illuminated). If you do so, the tool geometry offset data could be changed, depending on the state of contact between the base and the presetter arm.

[Interference of the tool, tool holder, and/or turret head with the workpiece, chuck, and/or fixture, Machine damage]

3.When installing the presetter arm on the machine or when removing it from the machine or storage box, do not give physical shock to the presetter arm, especially, to the sensor.

[Sensor and presetter arm damage]

1. Do not clean the sensor using the coolant gun or air blow gun in the presetter mode. Do not subject the sensor to excessive shock. The sensor may detect the shock and the measurement data may be accidentally updated with this value.

2.In the presetter mode, if the tool tip is brought into contact with the stylus by moving two axes simultaneously or if the sensor is turned on although no axis is moved, the tool geometry offset data is not input.

3.Keep the presetter arm-to-base joint free of chips, dust, and other foreign matter and also protect them from splashing coolant. Chips, coolant, and foreign matter reduce measuring accuracy, resulting in lower machining accuracy. There will also be occasions when the presetter arm cannot be used due to improper contact of the connecting parts.

4.Keep the connecting part of the protective cover free of chips, dust, and other foreign matter and also protect them from splashing coolant. These will cause improper contact of the connecting parts, making it impossible to use the machine when the protective cover is installed on the base.

1-44

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

 

 

 

5.

1. 52 mm/min

2.15 mm

RESET5 mm PC "EX4917"

RESET

5. Ensure the tool presetter does not interfere with the tool during stylus approach or retraction at a rapid traverse rate.

6.When measuring the tool geometry offset data, be sure to use presetter measurement sub mode. If the tool geometry offset data is measured using handle mode, the measured data may be unstable. To retract a tool that is touching the sensor by using handle mode, keep pressing the axis feed button in the jog mode.

When the machine is in the following status, the presetter measurement sub mode is in effect.

The presetter arm is mounted.

In the presetter mode (when the indicator in the [Presetter Mode]

button is illuminated)

The mode selection button [Jog] is pressed.

<Cautions on Operations in the Presetter Measurement Sub Mode>

1. In the presetter measurement sub mode, manual axis feedrate is fixed at 52 mm/min.

2.When the axis feed button is pressed once while the axis is stopped, the axis moves

5 mm. To stop the axis movement, press the

(RESET) key to cancel the presetter measurement sub mode. If the tool does not touch the stylus even if the axis is moved 5 mm, the PC alarm "EX4917 TOOL DOESN'T TOUCH ON THE SENSOR" is displayed. Release the alarm

by pressing the (RESET) key before pressing the [Presetter Mode] button and press the axis movement button again.

3.In uni-directional axis movement in the presetter measurement sub mode, the axis movement direction is not changed even if the axis feed button of the other axis feed direction is pressed.

4.In uni-directional axis movement in the presetter measurement sub mode, if the axis feed button of the same axis feed direction is held down, the axis moves while the button is being held down and stops when it is released, as in normal jog feed operation.

 

BASIC OVERVIEW 1-45

9-1

Interlocks for Using Manual In-Machine Tool Presetter

25%

25%

主軸の回転およびクーラントの吐出が停止します。

7.

1.The OFFSET/GEOMETRY screen will not be displayed even when the presetter arm is mounted unless the following requirements are satisfied.

Turret head indexing is completed and the turret head is clamped.

A manual mode (handle, jog, rapid traverse, zero return) is selected.

2.To prevent interference with the presetter arm, the following operations are not allowed when the presetter arm is mounted.

Tailstock spindle IN/OUT and inching operation (tailstock specification)

Work unloader operation (work unloader specification)

3.Axis movement stops if the cutting tool comes into contact with the stylus; after axis movement is stopped, the axis can only be moved in the direction in which the cutting tool is moved away from the stylus.

4.After installing the presetter arm, axis movement is

precluded unless the [Presetter Mode] button is illuminated. Even if the button is illuminated and therefore the axis can be moved, the rapid traverse rate is restricted to 25% or less.

5.The presetter arm clamp signal is turned on when the locking lever is turned to the lock position with the presetter arm installed to the presetter arm installation base.

Axis movement is enabled when the indicator in the

[Presetter Mode] button is illuminated with the presetter arm clamp signal ON. In this case, the rapid traverse rate is fixed at 25% or less.

Axis movement is not allowed even when the locking lever is in the lock position unless the presetter arm or the protective cover is installed to the presetter arm installation base.

6.The cover closed status is checked through installation of the protective cover on the base. When the locking lever is turned to the clamp side, the cover "closed" status is detected. If the cover closed check signal is turned off, operation is suspended in the following manner.

<Manual mode>

Spindle rotation and coolant supply are stopped.

<Automatic mode>

An alarm message is displayed and automatic operation is suspended. Spindle rotation, axis movement, and coolant supply are stopped.

7.If the WORK COORDINATES screen is not displayed

even if the indicator in the [Presetter Mode] button is illuminated, check the following items if they are satisfied.

The protective cover of the presetter arm is mounted to the base of the tool presetter.

The locking lever for the protective cover is locked.

1-46

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

9-2

Installing and Removing the Manual In-Machine Tool Presetter Arm

 

<Installing the Presetter Arm>

 

 

 

 

 

Procedure

 

 

 

 

1.

Clean the area around the base.

Turn the locking lever counterclockwise and remove the

2. protective cover.

3.

 

Remove the presetter arm from the container.

4.

 

Make sure that the connecting parts of the presetter arm

 

and the base are free of chips and foreign matter.

 

 

Install the presetter arm to the base while positioning the

 

 

alignment mark to the locking lever on the base.

 

 

 

 

 

Positioning Pin

 

 

 

 

Locking Lever

 

 

 

 

 

Stylus

5.

Alignment

Mark Base

 

 

 

Protection Cover

 

 

Presetter Arm

 

 

Grip

 

6.

Turn the locking lever clockwise.

 

If the locking lever cannot be moved to the full lock or

 

unlock position because it interferes with the cover,

 

pull the lever up in its current position. The lever can

 

then be moved freely. Move the lever in the direction

 

opposite the desired direction and pull it downward.

 

Then try the locking or unlocking operation again.

 

 

 

BASIC OVERVIEW 1-47

 

 

 

 

 

<Removing the Presetter Arm>

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Procedure

 

 

 

 

 

1.

 

Hold the presetter arm and turn the locking lever coun-

 

 

terclockwise.

2.

 

 

Pull the presetter arm to remove it from the base.

 

 

 

 

 

3.

 

 

Store the presetter arm in the container.

 

 

 

 

4.

 

Make sure that the connecting parts of the base and the

 

 

protective cover are free of chips and foreign matter.

 

 

 

Insert the protection cover to the base while positioning

 

 

 

 

the alignment mark to the locking lever on the base and

 

 

 

 

turn the locking lever clockwise.

5.

 

 

Alignment Mark

 

 

If the locking lever cannot be moved to the full lock or

 

unlock position because it interferes with the cover,

 

pull the lever up in its current position. The lever can

 

then be moved freely. Move the lever in the direction

 

opposite the desired direction and pull it downward.

 

Then try the locking or unlocking operation again.

 

 

1-48

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

9-3

Measurement Procedure with the Manual In-Machine Tool Presetter

ト値を設定します。

"" 1-49

In this section, the tool geometry offset data below are set on the OFFSET/GEOMETRY screen:

For details of the tool geometry offset data, refer to "Sensors, Tools, and Parameters" (page 1-49).

1.

 

 

 

Perform a turret zero return.

 

Zero Return

 

" " 1-12

 

 

"ZERO RETURN OPERATION"

 

Operation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(page 1-12)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2.

 

1)

 

 

1)

Open the door.

 

 

2)

 

2) Install the tool presetter.

 

Tool

 

 

 

 

[[Presetter Mode] button illuminated]

 

Presetter

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

[OFFSET/GEOMETRY screen displayed]

 

 

 

 

 

 

For the installation procedure, refer

 

 

 

"

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

to "Installing and Removing the Man-

 

 

 

 

 

 

ual In-Machine Tool Presetter Arm"

 

 

 

" 1-46

 

 

(page 1-46).

 

 

3)

 

 

3)

Close the door.

3.

 

 

Index the turret station number on which the tool

 

 

 

 

to be measured is mounted.

 

Indexing

 

 

 

Before indexing the turret, confirm that

 

Turret

 

 

 

 

 

 

the indexing motion will cause no

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

interference.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.

 

1)

 

1) Using the manual pulse generator, move

 

Measure-

 

2 mm

 

the tool tip to a point approximately 2 mm

 

ment/Value

2)

 

 

 

from the stylus.

 

Entry

 

 

2)

Press the mode selection button [Jog].

 

 

3)

 

 

[Presetter measurement sub mode starts]

 

 

 

 

 

3) Press the required axis feed button to bring

 

 

 

 

 

 

the tool tip into contact with the stylus.

 

 

 

 

 

[Contact with stylus]

 

 

 

 

 

[Buzzer activated]

 

 

 

 

 

[Presetter lamp changes from green to red]

 

 

 

 

 

[Axis automatically moves away the stylus,

 

 

 

 

 

and lamp changes to green]

 

 

 

 

 

 

[Geometry offset value is entered in the

 

 

 

 

 

 

geometry offset column of the indexed tool]

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Tool Tip

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Lamp

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Stylus

5.

X Z

Measure and enter the tool geometry offset

 

 

values for the X- and Z-axes by following the

Multi-

 

procedure given above.

Directional

 

 

Measurement

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

BASIC OVERVIEW 1-49

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6.

 

1)

 

1)

Prior to rotating the turret head, move the

 

 

 

 

 

 

turret to a position out of the range of

 

 

Next Tool

 

 

 

 

 

 

interference between the tools and the tool

 

 

Measure-

2)

3. 5.

 

presetter.

 

 

ment

 

 

 

 

 

2)

Repeat the steps 3. to 5. above.

 

7.

 

1)

 

 

 

1)

Press the [Presetter Mode] button.

 

 

Measure-

 

 

 

 

 

[Button extinguished]

 

 

ment Com-

2)

 

2)

Remove the tool presetter.

 

 

pletion

 

"

 

For the procedure for removal, refer

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

to "Installing and Removing the Man-

 

 

 

 

 

1-46

 

 

ual In-Machine Tool Presetter Arm"

 

 

 

 

"

 

 

(page 1-46).

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2-150

For the tool geometry offset number, refer to "T

 

 

 

 

"T

"

FUNCTION" (page 2-150)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

9-4

Sensors, Tools, and Parameters

The relationships between the sensors of the manual in-

 

 

 

 

machine tool presetter and tools and parameters are

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

described here.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ZWP

 

 

 

POS "Z"

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

No. 5017

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

NC

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(NC Parameter)

 

 

 

 

 

POS "X"

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A

 

 

W

D

 

 

C

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cutting Allowance W

 

 

 

 

 

 

B

No. 5016

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

No. 5015

 

 

 

 

NC

Chuck

 

 

 

 

NC

 

 

 

 

(NC Parameter)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(NC Parameter)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Workpiece

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

X0

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ZW

No. 5018 = 0

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Z0

 

 

NC

(NC Parameter)

1-50

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

 

 

 

POS "X"

 

 

X coordinate value where the tool tip comes into

 

contact with face A of the stylus (machine

 

 

A X

coordinate system) or the sensor contact

 

 

 

POS "Z"

 

 

Z coordinate value where the tool tip comes into

 

contact with face C of the stylus (machine

 

 

C Z

coordinate system) or the sensor contact

 

 

 

No. 5015

 

 

Set the X coordinate value (in diameter) where

NC

 

the sensor is turned when the tool tip comes

 

B X

into contact with face B of the stylus or the

(NC parameter)

 

 

sensor contact.

No. 5016

 

 

Set the X coordinate value (in diameter) where

NC

 

the sensor is turned when the tool tip comes

 

A X

into contact with face A of the stylus or the

(NC Parameter)

 

 

sensor contact.

No. 5017

 

 

Set the distance between the two points where

NC

 

C D

the sensor is turned on when the tool tip comes

(NC Parameter)

 

 

into contact with face C and face D of the stylus

 

 

(with minus sign) or the sensor contact.

No. 5018

 

 

Set the position data of the position where the

NC

 

sensor is turned on when the tool tip comes into

 

C

contact with face C of the stylus (set zero) or the

(NC Parameter)

 

 

sensor contact.

ZWP

 

 

Z-axis work shift data which is set when the

 

Z

[Presetter Measurement] button is pressed

 

 

W

 

ZWP Z

Cutting allowance in Z-axis direction in

Cutting Allowance W

 

reference to ZWP

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ZWP W Z

Z-axis work shift data that is a sum of ZWP and

ZW

 

Z0

cutting allowance W. This sets the program

 

 

 

zero (Z0).

NC No. 5015 No. 5018

状補正値は、スタイラスまたはセンサの接点に工具の刃先 を接触させることで、スタイラスまたはセンサの接点を基 準として設定されます。

Z C Z0

The tool geometry offset data is set in reference to the stylus or the sensor contact by bringing the tool tip into contact with the stylus or the sensor contact for which the coordinate values are set with NC parameters (No. 5015 to No. 5018) as illustrated above.

For the Z-axis work shift data, set the distance between stylus C or the sensor contact and the program zero (Z0).

 

BASIC OVERVIEW 1-51

10 Z

SETTING WORKPIECE ZERO POINT (Z0)

と、実際の加工原点の距離を、ワーク座標系設定画面に設 定します。

いては、" "

1-49

に、〔プリセッタ測定〕

Set the distance between the tentative workpiece zero point and the actual workpiece zero point on the WORK COORDINATES screen.

For the relationship between the work coordinate system and tools or tool presetter, refer to "Sensors, Tools, and Parameters" (page 1-49).

While the conditions below are satisfied, do not press the

[Presetter Measurement] button without cutting the workpiece end face.

The presetter arm is removed from the base.

The protective cover is installed on the base.

The indicator in the [Presetter Mode] button is illuminated.

If the [Presetter Measurement] button is pressed in this state, the work shift data cannot be set correctly. If the program is executed while the input work shift data is incorrect, the tool, tool holder, and/or the turret head will strike the workpiece, chuck, or fixture, damaging the machine, or the tool may not reach the workpiece. [Machine damage]

2. Z

1.Ensure the tool presetter does not interfere with the tool during stylus approach or retraction at a rapid traverse rate.

2.The Z-axis work shift offset data can be set only once by pressing the [Presetter Measurement]

button.

To set the Z-axis work shift offset data for

another tool, turn off the [Presetter Mode] button once and then turn it on again.

1-52

 

BASIC OVERVIEW

10-1

Before Setting

 

 

 

Set the tool geometry offset data.

1.

"

"SETTING TOOL GEOMETRY OFFSET

" 1-43

VALUE (WITH TOOL PRESETTER)" (page

 

 

 

 

 

 

1-43)

 

 

Clamp a workpiece, and adjust the chucking pressure.

2.

"

 

1-54

 

"CHUCKING" (page 1-54)

 

"

 

 

10-2

Z

 

 

 

 

 

Setting Workpiece Zero Point (Z0)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1.

 

Set the door interlock key-switch in the [NORMAL]

 

 

 

 

 

position.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2.

 

 

Close the door.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Place the operation selection key-switch in one of the

 

3.

 

 

positions indicated below.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

[Operation Enable]

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

[Operation & Edit Enable]

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Press the [Presetter Mode] button.

 

4.

 

[Presetter mode ON]

 

 

 

[Button illuminates]

 

 

 

[WORK COORDINATES screen appears]

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Move the turret to the position where the tool will not

 

5.

 

 

interfere with the workpiece when the turret head is

 

 

 

 

 

 

rotated.

 

6.

 

Index manually the cutting tool that allows facing.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Move the tool close to the workpiece end face "Z0"

 

7.

"Z0"

position using a manual operation mode while

 

 

 

 

 

observing the clearance between the workpiece and

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

the tool through the door window.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

8.

 

Press the [Door Unlock] button.

 

 

 

[Door is unlocked.]

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

9.

 

 

Open the door.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

10.

 

Confirm that there will be no interference between the

 

 

chuck or workpiece and the adjacent tools or fixture.

 

11.

 

 

Close the door.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

12.

 

Start the spindle manually, and adjust the spindle speed

 

 

 

as appropriate.

 

 

 

Cut the workpiece end face.

 

 

 

 

Z X

 

 

Move the tool only in the X-axis direction, not in

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

the Z-axis direction.

 

13.

 

 

 

 

 

With a workpiece whose end face does not

 

 

 

X

 

 

require cutting, it is not necessary to move the

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

tool in the X-axis direction. In this case, bring the

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

tool tip into light contact with the workpiece end

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

face.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

14.

"00(EXT)" "Z"

Confirm that "Z" of "00(EXT)" is selected.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Loading...